JP6823918B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "game medium") are inserted, and the start lever is operated by the player. Detects that the start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requests that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. A stop switch that outputs a signal, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls the operation of each reel and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (hereinafter, "" There is known a so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing of detecting that the stop button has been operated and the "internal winning combination").

As such a conventional game machine, it has a general role and a special role as an internal winning combination, and the probability that the general winning combination is internally won is made equal for all the set values, while the probability that the special winning combination is internally won depends on the set value. If the special combination is configured differently and the special combination is internally won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination will be stopped and displayed when the predetermined stop operation is performed, while the general combination will be displayed if the predetermined stop operation is not performed. There is known a gaming machine in which a combination of corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed (see Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the same number of medals are paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the general combination is stopped and displayed. It is said.

Such a game machine can provide an opportunity for a player who can push a button to determine a set value, and a player who can push a button and a player who cannot push a button. , It becomes possible to guarantee fairness.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-337506

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the player is only allowed to enjoy the opportunity to determine the set value as a benefit when a predetermined stop operation is performed because the attempt is to ensure fairness among the players. Therefore, once the set value can be determined, there is a problem that the subsequent game becomes monotonous as a result of the player stopping the predetermined stop operation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and the subsequent game can be performed by causing the player to perform a stop operation based on the information obtained from the opportunity to determine the set value. An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and a display window 4) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
Start command means (for example, start lever 16 and start switch 64) that output a start command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the internal winning combination determines the internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to one set value set from a plurality of types of setting values. Determining means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 62) and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display means (for example, the process of step S19 in FIG. 59 and step S324 in FIG. 71). Main CPU93) that executes the processing of
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and stop switch 17S) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, the stop display of the symbol whose variation is being displayed by the variation control means is stopped. Control means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 68 and the process of step S324 of FIG. 71) and
A game medium giving means (for example, a main CPU 93 that executes the process of step S25 of FIG. 59) that gives a number of game media determined based on a display mode of a symbol that is stopped and displayed by the stop control means.
When a specific combination (for example, "GOD") is determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a specific timing (for example, when the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing). , Setting that suggests which of the plurality of types of setting values is set by executing a specific effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) with a probability corresponding to the one set value. A suggestion effect executing means (for example, a sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 161) is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the first set value (for example, settings 1, 3, 5) is set as the set value, the first set value as the internal winning combination is compared with the case where the second set value is set. While the combination (for example, "213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", "231L bell 2") is determined with high probability, the second set value (for example, setting) is used as the set value. When 2, 4, 6) are set, as compared with the case where the first set value is set, the second winning combination (for example, "312L bell 1", "312L") is used as the internal winning combination. "Bell 2", "321L bell 1", "321L bell 2") are determined with high probability,
The stop control means
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means corresponds to the first predetermined stop operation (for example, when the stop operation for the middle stop button 17C is performed as the first stop operation), the above. A second predetermined stop operation in which the stop command signal output from the stop command means is different from the first predetermined stop operation while causing the symbol display means to stop and display the symbol in a display mode corresponding to the first combination. (For example, when the right stop button 17R is stopped as the first stop operation), the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the second combination. Let me
The game medium imparting means is
When the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the first combination or the second combination, a number of game media determined based on the display mode is given.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The specific effect is executed with different probabilities depending on whether the first set value is set as the set value or the second set value is set.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the invention of (1), one of a plurality of types of set values is set, and when a specific condition is satisfied based on an operation by a player, the set value is adjusted according to the one set value. There is a certain probability that a specific effect will be executed. This suggests which of the multiple types of setting values is set through the probability that a specific effect will appear, and gives the player an opportunity to determine the setting value. Can be provided.

On the other hand, according to the invention of (1), a first combination and a second combination are provided as internal winning combinations, and it is necessary to perform the first predetermined stop operation in order to win the first combination. Therefore, in order to win the second winning combination, it is necessary to perform the second predetermined stop operation. Then, when the first set value is set as the set value, the first combination is determined with a high probability as the internal winning combination, so that the player aims to win the first combination. By performing the first predetermined stop operation, there is a high possibility that the game medium can be acquired. Further, when the second set value is set as the set value, the second role is determined with a high probability as the internal winning combination, so that the player aims to win the second role. By performing the second predetermined stop operation, there is a high possibility that the game medium can be acquired.

From the above, when the first set value is set, it is advantageous for the player to perform the first predetermined stop operation, and when the second set value is set, it is an advantageous way of hitting. It can be said that it is an advantageous way for the player to perform the second predetermined stop operation. Then, when it is suggested that the first set value is set from the probability that a specific effect appears, the player enjoys more balls by performing the first predetermined stop operation. be able to. In addition, when it is suggested that the second set value is set from the probability that a specific effect appears, the player enjoys more balls by performing the second predetermined stop operation. be able to. As described above, according to the invention of (1), it is possible to make the player advantageously advance the subsequent game by causing the player to perform the stop operation based on the information obtained from the opportunity to determine the set value. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(2) The game machine of (1) above.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
When a specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing, the specific effect is not executed.
The stop control means
When a specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a specific timing, the specific symbol combination (for example, "GOD1" or "GOD2") is stopped and displayed.
When a specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing, a predetermined symbol combination different from the specific symbol combination (for example, "" Stop and display "Bell 1" to "Bell 16")
The game medium imparting means is
When the specific symbol combination or the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a number (for example, 14 or 1) of game media determined based on the symbol combination is given.
When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, less game medium is given than when the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by that.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further provided with a notification means for notifying information regarding the internal winning combination,
When the specific combination is determined, the notification that the specific combination has been determined is notified, and the specific combination is determined.
When the first combination is determined, the notification that the first combination has been determined is not notified, and the first combination is not notified.
When the second combination is determined, it does not notify that the second combination has been determined.
It is characterized by that.

( 4 ) A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and a display window 4) capable of displaying a variation of a symbol and a stop display, and
Start command means (for example, start lever 16 and start switch 64) that output a start command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the internal winning combination determines the internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to one set value set from the N set values. Determining means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 62) and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display means (for example, the process of step S19 in FIG. 59 and step S324 in FIG. 71). Main CPU93) that executes the processing of
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and stop switch 17S) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, the stop display of the symbol whose variation is being displayed by the variation control means is stopped. Control means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 68 and the process of step S324 of FIG. 71) and
A game medium giving means (for example, a main CPU 93 that executes the process of step S25 of FIG. 59) that gives a number of game media determined based on a display mode of a symbol that is stopped and displayed by the stop control means.
When the stop operation by the player is performed at a specific timing (for example, when the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing), a specific effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) has a probability corresponding to the one set value. The setting suggestion effect executing means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 161) is provided.
The N set values (for example, 6 set values 1 to 6) are K groups (for example, K is an integer of N or less) of the first set value group to the K set value group (K is an integer of N or less). , Odd group and even group) belong to one of the two groups.
As the internal winning combination, a first combination to a Kth combination (for example, "2L bell" and "3L bell") are provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When a set value (for example, setting 1) belonging to the third set value group (L is any one of 1 to K) (for example, an odd number group) is set as the set value, the internal winning combination As a result, the third combination (for example, "2L bell") of the first combination to the Kth combination is determined with a higher probability than the combination other than the first combination.
The stop control means
The stop command signal output from the stop command means is used to perform K types of stop operations (for example, an operation on the middle stop button 17C as a first stop operation) of a first predetermined stop operation to a K predetermined stop operation. Of the two types of stop operations, a stop operation and a stop operation in which the operation for the right stop button 17R is performed as the first stop operation), the L-predetermined stop operation (for example, for the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation). When the operation is performed in response to the stop operation), the symbol display means is made to stop and display the symbol in the display mode corresponding to the third combination.
The game medium imparting means is
When the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the Lth combination, a number of game media determined based on the display mode are given.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the invention of ( 4 ), one of the N set values is set (the N set values are K set values from the first set value group to the K set value group). When a specific condition is satisfied based on an operation by the player (belonging to any of the groups of), a specific effect is executed with a probability according to the one set value. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to determine the set value through the probability that a specific effect will appear.

On the other hand, according to the invention of ( 4 ), the first to K roles are provided as the internal winning combination, and the Lth combination (L is any of 1 to K) is won. It is necessary to perform the Lth predetermined stop operation in order to make it work. When a set value belonging to the L-th set value group is set as the set value, the L-role is determined with a high probability as the internal winning combination, and therefore, as a player, the L-role is determined. By performing the L-predetermined stop operation aiming at winning the prize, there is a high possibility that the game medium can be acquired.

From the above, it can be said that when the set value belonging to the Lth set value group is set, it is advantageous for the player to perform the Lth predetermined stop operation. Then, when it is possible to determine from the probability that a specific effect appears that the set value belonging to the Lth set value group is set, the player performs the Lth predetermined stop operation. You can enjoy more balls. As described above, according to the invention of ( 4 ), it is possible to make the player advantageously advance the subsequent game by causing the player to perform the stop operation based on the information obtained from the opportunity to determine the set value. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the subsequent game from becoming monotonous by causing the player to perform a stop operation based on the information obtained from the opportunity to determine the set value.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the signal transmitted from the external centralized terminal board of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention to an external device. It is a state transition diagram of the game state in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a state transition diagram of the sub-game state in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table following FIG. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table following FIG. It is a figure which shows the combination table by a flag stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the combination table by a flag following FIG. It is a figure which shows the combination table by a flag which follows FIG. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table (RT0 game state) stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table (RT1 game state) stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table (BB game state) stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the pull-in priority table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the pull-in priority order selection table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the priority order table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the carry-over combination storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the pull-in priority data storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the sub-flag conversion table which is referenced by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (normally) by a subflag state referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (in CZ1 and in CZ2) by a subflag state referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (in GG) by a sub flag state referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (in CZ3 and in CZ4) by a subflag state referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (in EG) by a subflag state referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (in SEG) by the sub flag state referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (in PEG) by the sub flag state referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the conversion table for sub-flag lottery which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the CZ number group lottery table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the CZ roll group lottery table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the CZ roll group conversion table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the CZ roll group conversion table following FIG. 43. It is a figure which shows the GG winning distribution table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the GG winning time distribution lottery table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the CZHOLD lottery table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the GG winning rate lottery table after CZHOLD referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the GG winning rate lottery table after CZHOLD following FIG. 48. It is a figure which shows the GG lottery table after CZHOLD referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the rewind lottery table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the rewinding winning distribution table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the rewinding winning distribution lottery table which is referred to by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the PEG promotion lottery table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the GG continuation rate lottery table at the time of EG relief referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the SEG addition game number lottery table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the history lottery table which is referred by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the history lottery table following FIG. 57. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing which is executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a game state flag transition process executed in the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 62. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a reel stop initial setting process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority storage process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 59 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 68. It is a flowchart which shows the pull-in priority table selection process which is executed in the pull-in priority order storage process shown in FIG. 65. 6 is a flowchart showing a symbol code storage process executed in the pull-in priority order storage process shown in FIG. 65 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 59. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process by the control of the main CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task which is activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 73. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task which is activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 73. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task which is started by the power-on process shown in FIG. 73. It is a flowchart which shows the main task executed in the mother task shown in FIG. 76. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task executed in the mother task shown in FIG. 76. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 78. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task which is activated in the mother task shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process executed in the command analysis process shown in FIG. 79. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 81. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery preprocessing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ counter processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ counter processing following FIG. 84. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in CZ executed by the sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in CZ following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 81. It is a flowchart which shows 1 stop, 2 stop processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows 3 stop processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows 3 stop processing following FIG. 90. It is a flowchart which shows 3 stop processing following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in EG executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in EG following FIG. 93. It is a flowchart which shows the process in EG following FIG. 94. It is a flowchart which shows the process in SEG executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in SEG following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in PEG executed by the sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in PEG following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in GG executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the common process executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the common process which follows FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the history information generation processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the history information generation processing following FIG. 103. It is a flowchart which shows the history information generation processing following FIG. 104. It is a flowchart which shows the history information generation processing following FIG. 105. It is a flowchart which shows the common lottery process executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery post-processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ activation process executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the GG activation processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the state in which the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device is held by a sub CPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the state in which the "mirror" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device at the time of the 1st stop by a sub CPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the state which "mirror" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device at the time of the 1st and 2nd stop by a sub CPU. (A) is a timing chart of various signals including an external signal 2 when a combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on an effective line when not in GG by GOD alignment, and (b) is a GG by GOD alignment. It is a timing chart of various signals including the external signal 2 when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line again. It is a schematic diagram of a lamp 19L. It is a figure which shows the CZ1 button stock lottery table which is referred to in the modification of the processing in CZ executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the CZ1GG lottery table which is referred to in the modification of the processing in CZ executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the CZ1 button counter GG conversion lottery table which is referred to in the modification of the processing in CZ executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the processing in CZ executed by the sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the processing in CZ following FIG. 119. It is a figure which shows the transition transition of the main game state. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the internal winning combination and the payout number for each input number. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the push order and the payout number. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the combination table by a flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table by a flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table by a flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table by a flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table by a flag. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 game state (three-card game). (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 game state (two-card game). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 game state (three-card game). (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 game state (two-card game). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for a BB game state. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB game state. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state flag transition processing performed in the main control circuit. (A) is a figure which shows the carry-over combination storage area. (B) is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation check process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of receiving the input number notification command performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the transition transition of the main game state. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 game state (three-card game). (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 game state (two-card game). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 game state (three-card game). (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 game state (two-card game). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT2 game state (three-card game). (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT2 game state (two-card game). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for a BB game state. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB game state. It is a flowchart which shows the game state flag transition processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of receiving the input number notification command performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the input sheet number notification flag clearing process performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for a BB game state. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the internal winning combination and the number of payouts. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the setting suggestion effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 game state. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the push order and the payout number. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a start command performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of receiving a winning operation command performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the setting suggestion effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 game state. It is a figure which shows the setting suggestion effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 game state. It is a figure which shows the setting suggestion effect lottery table.

[First Embodiment]
A pachislot machine, which is a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 115. First, the functional flow according to the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG.

In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal winning combination determining means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. That is, when the start lever is operated, the internal winning combination determining means determines the internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined winning probability, assuming that the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The main control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, re-game operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "loss". Is provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Controls to stop the fluctuation of the symbol. The reel stop control means is carried by a main control circuit and a stepping motor, which will be described later.

In the pachislot machine, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified time is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 4 symbols, and when the specified time is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 1 symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols within the specified time of 190 msec (4 frames of the symbols) on the winning determination line. Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along. In addition, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop it.

The winning determination means wins or does not win a winning combination based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning determination line based on the fact that all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped by the reel stop control means and the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped. Judge the winning. The main control circuit described later is responsible for the winning determination means. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the winning combination is a winning combination, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot machine, the above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game.

Further, in the pachislot machine, in the series of flows described above, the image display performed by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, the light output performed by various lamps, the sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. And various productions are performed.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter, random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. A sub-control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot machine>
Next, the appearance structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a as a housing for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a. Handles 2c are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 2c is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 2c is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

On the back side of the front door 2b, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R (three in the present embodiment) in which a plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are displayed at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction are provided. Has been done.

A backlight (not shown) is provided inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The backlight illuminates the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R from behind, and corresponds to the three symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display window 4 described later, and per reel 3L, 3C, 3R. , There are three backlights arranged vertically.

These backlights are also used for lamp effects generated after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped. A plurality of types of lamp effects are set in association with the type of small winning combination, but are forcibly terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the predetermined conditions correspond to, for example, the case where the payout of medals accompanying the small winning combination is completed, the case where the automatic insertion of medals by the winning of the replay is completed, or the case where the player takes care of the medals. To do.

If the completion of payout permits the insertion of medals into the next game, or the automatic insertion or maintenance of the start operation of the next game is permitted, the next game can be played by forcibly ending the production by the backlight. The display result can be clearly displayed to the player before the start.

Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. The plurality of (for example, 20) patterns described above are drawn on the surface of the sheet material described above.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9 and a liquid crystal display device 11 as an image display means for displaying an image. The door body 9 is rotatably attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 has a display surface larger than that of the display window 4, and displays information related to the game, such as an image related to a game effect, a decorative pattern for notification, and a history of past unit game results. It is provided above the display window 4. In this way, the liquid crystal display device 11 constitutes the history display means. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 can perform an effect by displaying an image, and can also display game table information such as customization of a game machine and game history.

Further, the front door 2b has a display window 4 capable of visually recognizing the three reels 3L, 3C and 3R. The display window 4 is composed of three left display windows 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

These display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and are in front of the three reels (player side). ) Is provided. As a result, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R can display a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R constitute a symbol display means.

In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reels provided behind them is stopped. It is set to a size that can display three symbols. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle, and lower regions are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each region. Then, in the present embodiment, the line connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R is a winning determination line (also an effective line) for determining whether or not to win. It is defined as 8).

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. That is, the medal insertion slot 13 is for inserting medals by the player. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button 18. The settlement button 18 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1.

The start lever 16 is for starting the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R) according to the operation of the player, and constitutes a start operation means.

The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and are for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the operation of the player. .. These stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R constitute a stop operation means. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, on the left side of the display window 4, a 7-segment display 28 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided. The 7-segment display 28 provides information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits), and the like. Display digitally.

A GOD button 29 is provided on the right side of the display window 4. The GOD button 29 is pressed by the player, for example, in the production related to the game, and is used in the production linked with the lamps 19L and 19R described later. The GOD button 29 can be pressed at the time of an effect other than the above-mentioned effect or when an effect is generated. In addition to the lamps 19L and 19R, the GOD button 29 is also used for a pressing operation for reproducing a special voice by interlocking with the speakers 23L and 23R, for example.

A medal payout outlet 21, a medal tray 22, speakers 23L, 23R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 21 guides the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 43, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 22 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 21. In addition, the speakers 23L and 23R output sound effects, music, and the like corresponding to the content of the production.

Further, lamps 19L and 19R capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors are provided on the left and right sides of the door body 9 so as to sandwich the liquid crystal display device 11. The lamps 19L and 19R are composed of LED group 25 (see FIG. 3) described later. The lamps 19L and 19R are not limited to LEDs, and existing light emitting elements such as organic electroluminescence (organic EL) may be used as long as they can emit light at least in green, yellow, blue, and red.

<Electrical configuration of pachislot machines>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 3, the pachislot machine 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b. The reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control board 41. ing.

The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and outputs a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R. Relay.

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R change the design by rotating each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, that is, the start lever 16 being operated by the player (start operation). Let me. The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R constitute a symbol changing means. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage is full of medals.

A power switch 44a is connected to the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

A medal sensor 46, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, and a sub relay board 69 are connected to the door relay terminal board 54. .. That is, the medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub relay board 69 are mainly connected via the door relay terminal board 54. It is connected to the control board 41.

The medal sensor 46 detects that the medal has passed through a selector (not shown), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button 18 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch 17S corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The stop switch 17S detects that a stop operation for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, that is, each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player.

The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when receiving the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when the replay is performed. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 28 and an LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 70, for example, lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub-control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 are electrically connected to the sub-relay board 69.

The sub-control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub-relay board 69. Further, the sub-control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 via the sub-relay board 69.

The sound I / O board 71 outputs audio to the speakers 23L and 23R. The LED board 72 causes the LED group 25, which shows a specific example of the light source, to emit light according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 5), and displays the blinking pattern.

The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 stores the open / close history of the front door 2b. Further, when the front door 2b is opened, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error to the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101).

The ROM cartridge board 76, the liquid crystal relay board 77, and the GOD button 29 are connected to the sub-control board 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing image (video), audio, light (LED group 25), and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control circuit 91 as the main control unit controls the progress of the game with the microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as the main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).

The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and is provided at a predetermined position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part are connected by rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed between them.

Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set for four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four ahead of the symbol can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control circuit 101 as a sub-control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and the effect content is determined and executed based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 11, the LED group 25, and the speakers 23L and 23R are controlled. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 76 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 25, and speakers 23L and 23R. Includes voice control tasks and the like that control the output of the sound from the LED.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. Further, a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like are included.

The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 23L and 23R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 25 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<External centralized terminal board>
Next, various signals transmitted from the external centralized terminal plate 56 to the external device 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing an example of various signals transmitted from the external centralized terminal plate 56 to the external device 200. Here, the external device 200 is composed of, for example, an external display that displays the number of games played, the number of AT operations, and the like, a host computer of the game hall, and the like.

The main control board 41 is connected to the input terminal 56a of the external centralized terminal board 56 via a plurality of electric cables and a cabinet-side relay board 53. The external centralized terminal board 56 receives signals such as the number of medals inserted / paid out from the main control board 41, the number of games played, and AT operation presence / absence information via the input terminal 56a, and outputs these signals to the output terminal 56b. Is output to the external device 200. The external display is installed above, for example, the pachislot machine 1, updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the AT operation, and notifies the AT operation by a lamp or the like.

Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 16 is operated. The medal payout signal (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a payout signal) is a signal that enables recognition of the medal payout or re-game, and is output at the time of medal payout (including credit storage) or at the time of re-game operation.

The external signal 1 is a signal that makes it possible to recognize that the GG described later has been started, and is, for example, a push order (for example, 213C bells 1 to 6 and 213L bells 1, 2, etc.) of a specific push order bell. Stop order) Output after the third stop in the game when the correct answer occurs two times in a row.

The external signal 2 is a signal that makes it possible to recognize that GG has been started due to the GOD alignment described later, and is output after the third stop in the game when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed. The output timing of the external signal 2 after the third stop differs depending on the value of the GOD counter described later. The details of the output timing of the external signal 2 will be described later.

The external signal 3 is a signal that makes it possible to recognize that the player has won the internal winning combination of any of Red 7 Lip 1 to Red 7 Lip 3, and Right Red 7 Lips 1 and 2. For example, these Red 7 Lips 1 ~ Red 7 Lips 3 and Right Red 7 Lips 1 and 2 are output after the third stop in the game when winning the internal winning combination.

In addition, for example, the security signal is a signal that enables recognition when an error occurs (for example, a medal jam, etc.), when a door is opened, when a setting is changed, etc., and is output when each event occurs.

Here, the main CPU 93 transmits the various signals described above to the external device 200 via the external centralized terminal plate 56 as signals indicating the state of the pachi-slot machine 1. In this way, the main CPU 93 constitutes the state transmission means.

[Transition of game state]
The main CPU 93 shifts two game states, a main game state and an RT game state, as the game state of the pachislot machine 1.

<Transition of main game state>
As shown in FIG. 7, the main CPU 93 takes either a general gaming state or a BB gaming state as the main gaming state. In the general game state, the main game state shifts to the BB game state when the operator of the big bonus as a bonus game (hereinafter, simply referred to as “BB”) wins a prize. Here, the BB is always in an internal winning state from the internal winning to the winning of the BB operating combination, and this state is hereinafter referred to as a "BB carry-over state".

In the BB game state, the main game state is when the BB end condition is satisfied, specifically, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (86 in the present embodiment) is paid out in the BB game state. Shifts to the general gaming state. The operation and termination of such a BB are controlled by the main CPU 93. In this way, the main CPU 93 constitutes the bonus game control means.

The main CPU 93 takes either a BB general game state or an RB game state as the BB game state.

When shifting from the general gaming state to the BB gaming state, the main gaming state shifts to the BB general gaming state. In the BB general game state, the main game state shifts to the RB game state when the RB operator wins a prize. Here, the RB is always in an internal winning state from the internal winning to the winning of the RB operating combination, and this state is hereinafter referred to as the "RB carry-over state".

In the RB game state, the winning probability of each small winning combination is defined to be low, but the display probability of displaying the combination of symbols constituting any of the small winning combination is set to be higher than that of the BB general gaming state. ing.

In the RB game state, the main game state is when the RB end condition is satisfied, specifically, when the number of games in the RB game state reaches a specified number of times (1 time in the present embodiment), or When the number of winnings of the small winning combination with the payout reaches the specified number of times (in the present embodiment, once), the game shifts to the BB general game state. The transition of the main gaming state in such a BB gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 93. In this way, the main CPU 93 constitutes the bonus game state transition control means.

In the RB game state, the main game state shifts to the general game state when the BB end condition is satisfied. Further, in the RB carry-over state, the main game state shifts to the general game state when the BB end condition is satisfied.

<Transition of RT game state>
In the general gaming state, the main CPU 93 takes either the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state as the RT gaming state. That is, the main CPU 93 shifts the RT gaming state between the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state. In this way, the main CPU 93 constitutes the RT game state transition control means.

The RT0 gaming state is a replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay winning combination, which is the operating combination of the replay, is relatively lower than that of the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively higher than that of the RT0 gaming state.

In the RT0 gaming state of the general gaming state, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state when the operating combination of the BB is determined as the internal winning combination. On the other hand, in the RT1 gaming state of the general gaming state, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state when the operating combination of the BB wins a prize and then the BB ends.

Here, the RT1 game state and the RT0 game state are not RTs managed by the number of games, but shift to another game state only when the above-mentioned transition condition is satisfied. In that sense, the RT1 gaming state and the RT0 gaming state are infinite RT.

As the transition condition of the RT gaming state, instead of the transition condition as described above, a combination of specific symbols is displayed as a combination of symbols for winning the BB operating combination, ending the BB, and shifting the RT gaming state. It may be that the unit game has been executed a predetermined number of times.

[Sub-game state of the game machine]
FIG. 8 is a state transition diagram of the sub-game state in the pachi-slot machine 1. As described above, while the RT game state is shifted by the main CPU 93, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of the effect and notifies the reels 3L, 3C, 3R of the stop operation, thereby performing the internal winning combination. Winning or non-winning in favor of the player, or shifting the sub-game state.

As described above, the sub CPU 81 constitutes a game state transition means for shifting the effect state to the advantageous gaming state in which the information of the advantageous stop operation regarding the awarding of medals is notified when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous gaming state corresponds to "AT" in which the sub CPU 102 notifies the stop operation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R so that the internal winning combination is won or not won in favor of the player. To do.

Further, in the present embodiment, "AT" includes "GG", "EG", "PEG" and "SEG" described later. Further, the state in which the AT state and the RT game state is the replay high probability state is referred to as "ART".

<GG>
The "GG" is performed with a predetermined number of games (100 games in the present embodiment) as one set. In this way, during GG, it is possible to win an internal winning combination so that the number of medals won increases without inserting medals. Therefore, as the number of GG sets increases, more medals are acquired. be able to. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, adding the number of GG sets (hereinafter, also referred to as “addition”) has a great influence on the acquisition of medals.

When the specific condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the GG. Specific conditions include winning a lottery according to the internal winning combination and winning a lottery according to the history of the internal winning combination as a result of the unit game. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the game state transition means.

The lottery according to the history of the internal winning combination is when a specific internal winning combination is won consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, or when a specific internal winning combination is won more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined number of games. It is done when you do.

Further, when the sub-game state is shifted to the GG, the sub CPU 102 notifies that the sub-game state is determined to be shifted to the GG by the combination of the plurality of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. As described above, the sub CPU 102 and the liquid crystal display device 11 form the game state transition notification means.

<CZ>
When the special condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub-game state to a special mode (hereinafter, referred to as "CZ") that can shift the sub-game state to the GG even if the specific condition is not satisfied. As a special condition, there is a case where a lottery is won according to the history of the internal winning role. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the special mode transition means.

The sub CPU 102 determines a plurality of decorative symbols to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub game state is CZ, and in the present embodiment, three decorative symbols by lottery. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws at least one decorative symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 each time the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S when the sub game state is CZ. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the decorative pattern determining means.

Each time the sub CPU 102 determines a decorative symbol, the image display means displays the determined decorative symbol. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the decorative symbol display means. When the sub-game state is CZ, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub-game state to GG when a special transition condition is satisfied in which the types of the three decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are the same.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub-game state to either CZ1 or CZ4 according to the sub-game state when the shift to CZ occurs. When the sub-game state is CZ (CZ1 or CZ2) in which the sub-game state has shifted from the normal state, the sub CPU 102 satisfies a special transition condition in which the types of the three decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are the same. , Shift the sub-game state to GG.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 is CZ (CZ3 or CZ4) in which the sub-game state has shifted from GG, a special transition condition is satisfied in which the types of the three decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are the same. GG is added to.

Further, in the sub CPU 102, the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are predetermined even if the types of the three decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are not the same when the sub game state is CZ. Each time a combination of specific decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as "GG winning reach") is formed, GG is added and the sub-game state is maintained in CZ until the end condition of CZ is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the end condition of the CZ includes that the special transition condition is satisfied and that the CZ continues for 5 games. The GG winning reach is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub-game state is normal, and the liquid crystal display device is displayed during the GG sign from winning the GG until the sub-game state shifts to the GG. It is included in the reach roll which is the display roll displayed on 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 is next in the CZ on the condition that the combination of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a combination of the same type of decorative symbols when the sub game state is the CZ. In the unit game of, a hold (HOLD) is performed to maintain a combination of decorative symbols of the same type, and an unmaintained decorative symbol is determined by lottery.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 will be described as determining the unmaintained decorative symbol by lottery in the next unit game in the CZ on condition that the hold is performed. In the unit game, each time a stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, a decorative symbol that is not maintained may be determined by lottery.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 does not necessarily hold the liquid crystal display, provided that the combination of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a combination of the same type of decorative symbols. Hold is performed on the condition that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the device 11 is a special combination among the combinations including some of the same types of decorative symbols.

For example, when the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is "7S7", the hold is performed as shown in FIG. 111, but the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is "7S7". In the case of "7V7", the hold is not performed.

<EG>
When the specific transition condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub-game state to the additional game state (hereinafter referred to as "EG") in which the additional lottery of the GG is performed over 16 games as the specified unit number of games.

For example, when the sub-game state is CZ and the liquid crystal display device 11 displays, for example, "SSS" as a combination of special symbols, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub-game state to GG and shifts to EG. Let me.

When the sub-game state is EG, the sub CPU 102 wins the internal winning combination in which the red 7s are aligned in the display window 4, and the red 7 alignment is displayed in the display window 4 as a combination of predetermined symbols. On the condition that the GG is added, the rewinding is performed so that the remaining number of games of the EG is set to 16 which is the specified unit number of games. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the additional game number setting means.

When the sub CPU 102 adds the GG when the sub-game state is the EG, the sub CPU 102 advantageously adds the GG to the player according to the number of remaining games of the EG. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the advantageous gaming state addition means.

Specifically, when the sub-game state is EG, the sub CPU 102 adds GG, which has a higher continuation rate as the number of remaining games of EG is smaller. Here, the continuation rate of GG means the probability that GG will be further added when GG is added. That is, the sub CPU 102 draws lots until the winning rate is non-winning, and the GG for the number of winning times is added.

<PEG>
When the special transition condition is satisfied when the sub-game state is EG, the sub CPU 102 has an additional high probability state (hereinafter, referred to as “PEG”) in which the probability that the GG is added is relatively high with respect to the EG. To shift the sub-game state to. The special transition conditions include winning the PEG promotion lottery performed when the sub-game state shifts to EG, and winning the rewinding to PEG in the rewinding lottery.

When the sub-game state is PEG, the sub CPU 102 adds the GG on the condition that the rewind is won, sets the remaining number of games of the EG to 16, and sets the sub-game state to the rewind lottery. Transfer to EG or PEG.

In the sub CPU 102, when the sub-game state is a game state other than PEG, the history of the internal winning combination satisfies the predetermined condition in PEG rather than the history of the internal winning combination satisfying the predetermined condition. May add GG in favor of the player.

That is, in the lottery according to the history of the internal winning combination, GG is added more favorably to the player when the sub-game state is PEG than when the sub-game state is other than PEG. It may be.

Specifically, in the lottery according to the history of the internal winning combination, the winning probability of GG and CZ is higher when the sub-game state is PEG than when the sub-game state is other than PEG. May be.

Further, the sub CPU 102 is more likely to be a player when a small winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in PEG than when a small winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a gaming state where the sub-game state is other than PEG. On the other hand, GG may be added in an advantageous manner.

Specifically, in the lottery according to the internal winning combination, even if the winning probability of GG and CZ is higher when the sub-game state is PEG than when the sub-game state is other than PEG. Good.

<SEG>
When the special condition is satisfied when the sub-game state is EG, the sub CPU 102 stops subtracting the number of EG games over the number of unit games determined by lottery until the addition of GG is performed (hereinafter, the sub-CPU 102). , "SEG") to shift the sub-game state.

That is, when the sub-game state is SEG, the number of games of EG is substantially increased, and the probability that GG is added is substantially increased. As a special condition, there is a case where the number of SEG additional games is drawn, which will be described later.

[Data table stored in the main ROM]
9 to 23 show various data tables stored in the main ROM 94.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 9 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of symbols are "GOD1", "GOD2", "Red 7", "Upper semicircle", "Lower semicircle", "Yellow 7", "Blue 7A", "Blue 7B", "Blue 7C". And "Blue 7D" are included.

Here, "GOD1" and "GOD2" need only be able to identify the main CPU 93 as internally different symbols, and in the present embodiment, the symbols can be recognized by the player as if they were the same symbol. To do. Similarly, "blue 7A", "blue 7B", "blue 7C", and "blue 7D" may also be the same as long as the main CPU 93 can be identified as having a different pattern internally, and in the present embodiment, they are the same. The design and the design that the player can recognize respectively.

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 10, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and in the present embodiment, it is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 10 represents a symbol code as data for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 9 has been described as representing an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, but is actually stored in the main ROM 94. The symbol arrangement table represents an array of symbol codes that identify symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R.

In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are "GOD1", "GOD2", "red 7", "upper semicircle", "lower semicircle", "yellow 7", and "blue" as described above. There are 10 types of "7A", "Blue 7B", "Blue 7C" and "Blue 7D".

In the symbol code table, "1" is assigned as the symbol code for the "GOD1" symbol. Further, "2" is assigned as a symbol code for the "GOD2" symbol. Further, "3" is assigned as a symbol code for the "red 7" symbol.

Similarly, from "4" as the symbol code for each symbol of "upper semicircle", "lower semicircle", "yellow 7", "blue 7A", "blue 7B", "blue 7C" and "blue 7D". "10" is assigned.

<Design combination table>
The symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 11 to 13 shows a combination of symbols identified by the storage area identification data represented by 22 bytes (hereinafter referred to as "combination") and a combination displayed on the effective line. It is associated with the number of medals paid out. The symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 11 to 13 are given names and brief explanations (remarks) for each combination in order to make the invention easier to understand.

For example, when the combination of "lower half circle-upper half circle-blue 7A" called "BB" is displayed along the effective line, the medal is not paid out, but the BB operates. That is, when "BB" is displayed along the effective line, the main game state shifts to the BB operating state.

Further, when the combination of "GOD1-yellow 7-red 7" called "T lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated. The same applies to "T Lip 2".

Further, when the combination of "GOD1-blue 7A-GOD1" called "CD lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated. The same applies to "CD Lip 2" to "CD Lip 4".

Further, when the combination of "GOD1-blue 7A-lower semicircle" called "B yellow lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated. The same applies to "B yellow lip 2" to "B yellow lip 4".

Further, when the combination of "blue 7A-blue 7A-blue 7A" called "C lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated. The same applies to "C lip 2" to "C lip 32".

Further, when the combination of "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7" called "Red 7 Lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated. The same applies to "Red 7 Lip 2" to "Red 7 Lip 44".

Further, when the combination of "blue 7B-lower semicircle-red 7" called "red 7F lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, the replay is activated. The same applies to "Red 7F Lip 2" to "Red 7 Lip 43".

Further, when the combination of "upper semicircle-yellow 7-yellow 7" called "unquestioned red F lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, the replay is activated. The same applies to "Unquestioned Red F Lip 2" or "Unquestioned Red F Lip 5".

In addition, when the combination of "upper semicircle-GOD1-GOD1" called "T-bell 1" is displayed along the effective line, 15 medals are paid out. The same applies to "T bell 2", "CD bell" and "C bell".

If a combination of "yellow 7-yellow 7-lower semicircle" called "2nd bell" is displayed along the effective line, three medals will be paid out. The same applies to the "3rd bell".

Further, when the combination of "GOD1-Blue 7A-Blue 7A" called "Bell 1" is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "bell 2" to "bell 32".

Further, when the combination of "GOD1-Yellow 7-GOD1" called "CU bell" is displayed along the effective line, 15 medals are paid out. Further, in the case of so-called GOD matching in which the combination of "GOD1-GOD1-GOD1" called "GOD1" is displayed along the effective line, 15 medals are paid out. The same applies to "GOD2".

Further, when the combination of "Red 7-Red 7-GOD1" called "Special SP1" is displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "special SP2" to "special SP8".

<Combination table by flag>
The flag-based combination tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 show the combinations that are allowed to be displayed on the effective line corresponding to the internal winning combination. As the internal winning combination in this embodiment, "normal lip", "right red 7F lip", "right red 7 lip 1", "right red 7 lip 2", "B yellow lip", "C lip", "Red 7F Lip 1", "Red 7F Lip 2", "Red 7F Lip 3", "Red 7 Lip 1", "Red 7 Lip 2", "Red 7 Lip 3", "213C Bell 1", "213C" Bell 2 ”,“ 213C Bell 3 ”,“ 213C Bell 4 ”,“ 213C Bell 5 ”,“ 213C Bell 6 ”,“ 231CD Bell 1 ”,“ 231CD Bell 2 ”,“ 231CD Bell 3 ”,“ 231CD Bell 4 ” , "231CD Bell 5", "231CD Bell 6", "312C Bell", "312T Bell 1", "312T Bell 2", "312T Bell 3", "312T Bell 4", "312CD Bell", "321C""Bell","321T Bell 1", "321T Bell 2", "321T Bell 3", "321T Bell 4", "321CD Bell", "213L Bell 1", "213L Bell 2", "231L Bell 1", "231L Bell 2", "312L Bell 1", "312L Bell 2", "321L Bell 1", "321L Bell 2", "Left CU Bell", "CU Bell", "C Bell", "Special Role" , "Special Eye Push", "Special SP", "GOD", "RB Role 1", "RB Role 2", "RB Role 3" and "BB".

For example, when the internal winning combination is "BB", the main CPU 93 allows the combination of "BB" to be displayed on the effective line. That is, when the internal winning combination is "BB", it means that the internal winning combination is in BB.

Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "Red 7 Lip 1", the main CPU 93 enables the combination of "T Lip 1", "T Lip 2" and "Red Lip 1" to "Red Lip 44". Allow to be displayed on the line.

Further, when the internal winning combination is "GOD", the main CPU 93 permits the combination of "GOD1", "GOD2" and "Bell 1" to "Bell 16" to be displayed on the effective line.

<Internal lottery table>
The plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 are stored in the main ROM 94 corresponding to each game state and each input number, and show the winning probability of each flag with the denominator of 65536 for each setting 1 to 6. There is. In particular, in the present embodiment, the internal lottery table when the number of input sheets is "3" will be described.

Here, FIG. 17 shows an internal lottery table when three cards are hung in the RT0 game state when the main game state is in the general game state other than the BB game state. For example, in FIG. 17, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the probability of "missing" is "0/65536", the probability of "BB" winning internally is "3969/65536", and "normally". The probability that the "rip" will win internally is "3640/65536", and the probability that the "special role" will win internally is "640/65536".

Further, FIG. 18 shows an internal lottery table when three cards are hung in the RT1 gaming state, that is, in the BB carry-over state when the main gaming state is in the general gaming state other than the BB gaming state. For example, in FIG. 18, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the probability of "missing" is "0/65536", and the probability of "BB + GOD" winning internally is "8/65536".

Further, FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table when the main gaming state is in the BB gaming state, that is, when three cards are hung in the BB gaming state. For example, in FIG. 19, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the probability of "missing" is "12948/65536", and the probability of "RB combination 1" winning internally is "5054/65536".

<Initial setting table for stopping rotation>
The rotation cylinder stop initial setting table shown in FIG. 20 is information for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and is predetermined according to the internal winning combination. The main CPU 93 has come to acquire various data for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by referring to the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table and acquiring the rotation cylinder stop number corresponding to the internal winning combination. There is.

Specifically, in the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table, in addition to the determination data for each pressing order, the table number selection data and the change data table number after the first cylinder first stop are associated with the rotation cylinder stop number. And, the first body stop data table number and the initial data after the first body stop first stop are specified according to the game state. These various data indicate various table numbers to be selected in the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R according to the progress of the unit game.

The “judgment data for each pressing order” includes the attraction priority table number and the attraction priority selection table number. The “draw-in priority table number” is a number for selecting the pull-in priority table shown in FIG. Further, the “draw-in priority selection table number” is a number for selecting the pull-in priority selection table shown in FIG. 22.

The "table number selection data" is a value referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a stop table number and a change status.

The "stop table number" is a number for selecting a stop table (not shown) to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L.

The "change status" of the table number selection data is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table number.

The first stop reel is the first reel, that is, the left reel 3L. It is the data referred to when is.

The "first cylinder stop data table number" is a number for selecting the first cylinder stop data table referred to when stopping the first cylinder from the first cylinder stop data table (not shown).

The "initial data after the first stop of the first cylinder" is the data referred to when the second and third cylinders are stopped, and includes the table number and the line status. The "table number" is a number for selecting (not shown) a stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder, which is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels.

The "change status" of the initial data after the first stop of the first cylinder is the line status for each game that represents the line referred to in the stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder selected based on the table number. This is the data to be changed.

"1st change data table number after the first stop of the cylinder" is for selecting the change data table after the first stop of the first cylinder (not shown) for changing the initial data after the first stop of the first cylinder. It is the data of.

<Draw-in priority table>
The attraction priority table shown in FIG. 21 shows which combination is prioritized for attraction among a plurality of combinations that can be displayed within the attraction range corresponding to the internal winning combination. In FIG. 21, the data of the winning operation flag representing the combination of combinations is omitted.

In the pull-in priority table, the pull-in priority of the combination represented by the winning operation flag is shown. The “draw-in priority data” is information provided for the main CPU 93 to identify the pull-in priority.

For example, in the pull-in priority table number "00", "T lip 1, 2", "CD lip 1-4", "C lip 1-32", "Red 7 lip 1-44" and "Red 7F lip". If it is judged that there is a possibility of winning a prize, "T lip 1" has a higher priority than "BB", so the reel 3L rotating so as to preferentially pull in "T lip 1". , 3C, 3R stop control is performed.

<Draw-in priority selection table>
In the attraction priority selection table shown in FIG. 22, the attraction priority table number for the stop operation type indicating the order of the reel stop operations is associated with each attraction priority selection table.

For example, in the attraction priority selection table number "01", when the first stop operation is "left", the attraction priority table number "03" is associated and the first stop operation is "right". In this case, the pull-in priority table number "00" is associated with the case.

Further, in the pull-in priority selection table number "01", when the first stop operation is "left" and the second stop operation is "middle" during the second stop operation ("left → middle" in the figure), When the pull-in priority table number "03" is associated and the first stop operation is "right" and the second stop operation is "left" during the second stop operation ("right → left" in the figure), The pull-in priority table number "00" is associated with it.

<Priority table>
The priority order table shown in FIG. 23 is referred to for determining the number of sliding pieces of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. In this embodiment, one priority order table is used. In the priority order table, the number of slip pieces is associated with the data for determining the number of slip pieces according to the priority order.

For example, in the priority order table, when the number of sliding pieces determination data is "3", the number of sliding pieces "3" has the highest priority order, followed by the number of sliding pieces "1", "0", "4". , "2", and the priority order goes down.

In this case, when the corresponding reel is slid by 3 pieces, if the combination corresponding to the internal winning combination can be displayed on the effective line, the number of sliding pieces "3" is selected and corresponds to the internal winning combination. If the combination cannot be displayed on the valid line, the priority order is lowered until the combination can be displayed on the valid line.

In addition, if the combination corresponding to the internal winning combination cannot be displayed on the effective line even if the priority order is lowered to the number of sliding pieces "2", or if there is no internal winning combination, the highest priority is given. The number of sliding pieces "3" having a high order is selected.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
24 to 31 show various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 95.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 is composed of seven storage areas of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6. In the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6, in the combination table for each flag shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the data (bits) corresponding to the internal winning combination associated with the combination is set to 1, and other data are set. It is reset to 0.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 25 represents a combination that can be displayed along the effective line after each reel of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped. That is, the display combination storage area represents a combination according to the winning internal winning combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped. The display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the combination displayed along the effective line after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 26 is allocated as many as the number of effective lines, and data that can be displayed along each effective line is set to 1 in each symbol code storage area, and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R Depending on the stop position, the data corresponding to the combination that cannot be displayed along the effective line is reset to 0.

<Carryover storage area>
The carry-over combination storage area shown in FIG. 27 stores data related to the carry-over combination. For example, on condition that the main game state is in the carry-over state of BB (between the BB flags), bit 7 of the carry-over combination storage area is set to "1", and the corresponding bit is set on condition that BB is activated. It is reset to "0".

<Game status flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 28 stores data related to the main game state and the RT game state. For example, on condition that the main game state is changed to the BB game state, the bit 7 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1", and the bits 0 to 6 are reset to "0".

Further, on condition that the main game state is changed to the RB game state, the bit 6 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1", and the bits 0 to 5 and 7 are reset to "0".

Further, on condition that the RT game state is changed to the RT0 game state, the bit 5 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1", and the bits 0 to 4, 6 to 7 are reset to "0". Further, on condition that the RT game state is changed to the RT1 game state, the bit 4 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1", and the bits 0 to 3, 5 to 7 are reset to "0".

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 29 stores the states of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. The bit 7 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and when the stop button 17L is operated, "1" is stored in the bit 7.

Similarly, the bit 6 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and when the stop button 17C is operated, "1" is stored in the bit 6. Further, the bit 5 corresponds to the stop button 17R, and when the stop button 17R is operated, "1" is stored in the bit 5.

Bit 3 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and when the stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 3. Bit 2 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and when the stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 2. Further, the bit 1 corresponds to the stop button 17R, and when the stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in the bit 1.

In the present embodiment, the effective stop button refers to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of detecting the stop operation by the main CPU 93.

<Press order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 30 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. Bit 7 corresponds to the pressing order of "left → middle → right", and when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”, “1” is stored in bit 7, and the other bits are set to “0”. It will be reset.

Similarly, bit 6 corresponds to the pressing order of "left → right → middle", bit 5 corresponds to the pressing order of "middle → left → right", and bit 4 corresponds to the pressing order of "middle → right → left". The pressing order of bit 3 corresponds to "right-> left-> middle", and the pressing order of bit 2 corresponds to "right-> middle-> left".

<Retract priority data storage area>
The pull-in priority data storage area shown in FIG. 31 includes a pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. Since the contents of the pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel and the pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel are the same as those of the pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, the pull-in priority for the left reel is described below. The data storage area will be described.

The pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel stores the pull-in priority data for each of the symbol position data. For example, among the pull-in priority data of the pull-in priority table shown in FIG. 21, any of the pull-in priority data based on the state of the internal winning combination and the other reels 3C and 3R is stored for each symbol position.

[Data table referenced by sub CPU]
<Sub-flag conversion table>
The sub-flag conversion table shown in FIG. 32 represents the sub-flag conversion number associated with the main flag correspondence number corresponding to the internal winning combination. In the sub-flag conversion table shown in FIG. 32, in order to make the invention easier to understand, in addition to the sub-flag conversion combination name corresponding to the sub-flag conversion number, the appearance combination according to the push order is shown.

Here, the appearance combination according to the push order represents the mode of the number of medals to be paid out or the pattern displayed in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R with respect to the push order. Further, in the sub-flag conversion table shown in FIG. 32, the pressing order is represented by a number, the stop button 17L is represented by "1", the stop button 17C is represented by "2", and the stop button 17R is represented by "3".

For example, the column in which the pressing order is represented as "213" is the number of medals to be paid out when the stop buttons 17C, 17L, 17R are operated in this order, or the symbols displayed in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. Indicates the display mode of.

The sub-flag conversion number is assigned from "0" to "25", and the sub-flag conversion role names are "off", "213 bell", "231 bell", "312 bell", "321 bell", "213L bell", and " 231L bell, "312L bell", "321L bell", "normal lip", "right red 7F lip", "right red 7 lip 1", "right red 7 lip 2", "B yellow lip", "C" "Rip", "Left CU Bell", "CU Bell", "C Bell", "Special Role", "Special Eye Push", "Special SP", "Red 7F1", "Red 7F2", "Red 7N", It is represented as "Red 7SP" and "GOD", respectively.

For example, the sub-flag conversion number 1 is associated with the main flag correspondence numbers 13 to 18 (that is, "213C bell 1" to "213C bell 6"), and is referred to as "213 bell" as the sub-flag conversion combination name.

The payout number of "213 bells" is 1 with a probability of 1/8 when the stop buttons 17C, 17L, and 17R are operated at random timing when the pressing order is "123" or "132". It becomes 0 with a probability of 7/8. The number of payouts of "213 bells" is 15 when the push order is "213" and 1 when the push order is "231", "312" or "321".

Further, the sub-flag conversion number 9 is associated with the main flag correspondence number 1 (that is, "normal rip"), and is referred to as "normal rip" as the sub-flag conversion combination name. The display mode of the "normal lip" is "upper blue 7" regardless of the pressing order, and "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is displayed in the upper part of the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

<Conversion table by sub-flag status>
The sub-flag state conversion tables shown in FIGS. 33 to 39 usually include seven tables corresponding to each sub-game state of CZ1 and CZ2, GG, CZ3 and CZ4, EG, SEG and PEG.

In each sub-flag state conversion table, the probability that each pre-conversion sub-flag conversion number (indicated by the sub-flag conversion role name in the figure) shown in the row direction is converted to the converted sub-flag conversion number shown in the column direction. Is represented.

The sub-flag conversion role name after conversion is different from the sub-flag conversion role name before conversion, and for the sub-flag conversion numbers "0" to "25", "off", "bell spill", "213 bell", and "231 bell". , "312 bell", "321 bell", "213L bell", "231L bell", "312L bell", "321L bell", "normal lip", "left normal lip", "medium normal lip", " B Yellow Lip "," C Lip "," Left CU Bell "," CU Bell "," C Bell "," Special Role SP "," Right Red 7F "," Red 7F1 "," Red 7F2 "," Red "7N", "Red 7SP" and "GOD" are associated with each other.

For example, when the sub-game state is normal, "213 bell", "231 bell", "312 bell", "321 bell", "213L bell", "231L bell", "312L bell" and "321L bell". "Bell" is converted to "bell spill" with a probability of 32768/32768.

When the sub-game state is GG, the "normal lip" is converted to a "normal lip" with a probability of 31744/32768 and converted to a "left normal lip" with a probability of 1024/32768.

<Conversion table for sub-flag lottery>
The sub-flag lottery conversion table shown in FIG. 40 represents a lottery sub-flag lottery number associated with the sub-flag lottery conversion number. In the sub-flag lottery conversion table shown in FIG. 40, the sub-flag lottery combination name corresponding to the sub-flag lottery number is shown in order to make the invention easier to understand.

Further, similarly to the conversion table for each sub-flag state, other tables described below will be illustrated and described using the sub-flag lottery combination name instead of the sub-flag lottery number, if necessary.

For example, in the sub-flag lottery conversion table shown in FIG. 40, the sub-flag conversion combination “missing” and “bell spill” are associated with the sub-flag lottering combination “missing”. Similarly, "213 bell", "231 bell", "312 bell", "321 bell" are associated with "15 bells", and "213L bell", "231L bell", "312L bell", " The "321L bell" is associated with the "three bells".

<CZ number group lottery table>
The CZ number group lottery table shown in FIG. 41 includes seven tables corresponding to each sub-game state of CZ1 to CZ4. Each CZ number group lottery table represents the probability that the number group A to the number group H are determined for each sub-flag lottery combination.

For example, when the sub-game state is CZ1 and the sub-flag lottery combination is "C lip", the number group C is determined with a probability of 21504/32768 and the number group D is determined with a probability of 3072/32768. , 7168/32768, the number group G is determined, and 1024/32768, the number group H is determined.

<CZ roll group lottery table>
The CZ roll group lottery table shown in FIG. 42 represents the probability that the type of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is determined for each number group when the sub-game state is any of CZ1 to CZ4. ing. By referring to the CZ roll group lottery table, the sub CPU 102 determines a candidate for the decorative symbol from the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 according to the number group.

The CZ roll group lottery table includes four tables for a first stop, a second stop (without a mirror), a second stop (with a mirror), and a third stop. The CZ roll group lottery table for the first stop is referred to when the type of the decorative symbol on the left of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the first stop reel is stopped is determined.

The CZ roll group lottery table for the second stop (without a mirror) is a second stop when "mirror" is not determined as the type of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the first stop reel is stopped. It is referred to when the type of the decorative symbol inside is determined when the stop reel is stopped.

The CZ roll group lottery table for the second stop (with a mirror) is the second stop when "mirror" is determined as the type of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the first stop reel is stopped. It is referred to when the type of decorative symbol inside is determined when the reel is stopped. The CZ roll group lottery table for the third stop is referred to when the type of the right decorative symbol among the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the third stop reel is stopped is determined.

Each CZ roll group lottery table represents the probability corresponding to the number group and the type of decorative symbol. Specifically, each CZ roll group lottery table shown in FIG. 42 shows the probability that the type of each decorative symbol is determined in each number group.

For example, in the CZ roll group lottery table for the first stop, when the number group D is determined, "V" is determined as the type of decorative symbol with a probability of 6553/32768, and 6556/32768. The "S" is determined with a probability, and the "mirror" is determined with a probability of 1966/32768.

Similarly, in the CZ roll group lottery table for the second stop (without a mirror), when the number group G is determined, "3" is determined as the type of decorative symbol with a probability of 10923/32768. , 10922/32768, "7" is determined, and 10923/32768, "S" is determined.

<CZ roll group conversion table>
The CZ roll group conversion table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 shows the types of left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub-game state is any of CZ1 to CZ4, that is, Indicates the roll group number corresponding to the displayed roll. In the CZ roll group conversion table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the types of decorative symbols constituting the displayed rolls and the contents of the roll groups are shown in order to make the invention easier to understand.

For example, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "113" (display roll number 1) is associated with the non-winning (roll group number 0). That is, when the display result is "113", it is a non-winning.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "177" (display roll number 21) is associated with the HOLD winning A7 (roll group number 1). That is, when the display result is "177", the hold lottery is performed.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "1VV" (display roll number 28) is associated with the HOLD winning AV (roll group number 2). That is, when the display result is "1VV", the hold lottery is performed.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "1SS" (display roll number 35) is associated with the HOLD winning AS (roll group number 3). That is, when the display result is "1SS", the hold lottery is performed.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "7S7" (display roll number 141) is associated with the HOLD winning B7 (roll group number 4). That is, when the display result is "7S7", the hold lottery is performed.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "VSV" (display roll number 178) is associated with the HOLD winning BV (roll group number 5). That is, when the display result is "VSV", the hold lottery is performed.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "SVS" (display roll number 209) is associated with the HOLD winning BS (roll group number 6). That is, when the display result is "SVS", the hold lottery is performed.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "135" (display roll number 8) is associated with the GG winning reach (roll group number 7). That is, when the display result is "135", the GG wins.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "111" (display roll number 0) is associated with the GG winning 135 (roll group number 8). That is, when the display result is "111", the GG wins.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "777" (display roll number 129) is associated with the GG winning 7 (roll group number 9). That is, when the display result is "777", the GG wins.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "VVV" (display roll number 172) is associated with the GG winning 7 (roll group number 10). That is, when the display result is "VVV", the GG wins.

Further, in the CZ roll group conversion table, the display roll "SSS" (display roll number 215) is associated with the GG & EG winning S (roll group number 11). That is, when the display result is "SSS", GG and EG win.

In addition, the CZ roll group conversion table associates the display roll "V1V" (display roll number 148) with the heaven transition roll (roll group number 12). That is, when the display result is "V1V", the remaining CZ games are in an advantageous state.

For example, when the heaven transition is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the remaining CZ games are in an advantageous state, the relative is a candidate for the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 regardless of the sub-flag lottery combination. A small number of decorative patterns are selected.

Specifically, when the remaining CZ games are in an advantageous state, in the CZ number group lottery table shown in FIG. 41, for any sub-flag lottery combination, the sub-flag lottery combination is set as "C bell" and a number is obtained. Group D or number group H is selected.

<Distribution table at the time of GG winning>
The GG winning distribution table shown in FIG. 45 represents a distribution number for determining the continuation rate of the winning GG.

Specifically, in the GG winning distribution table, a distribution number for distributing the GG continuation rate (hereinafter, simply referred to as "GG continuation rate") is associated with the sub-game state and the sub-flag lottery combination. ..

For example, when the sub-flag lottery combination is "15 bells", if the sub-game state is not in the GG book sign, "13" is determined as the distribution number, and the sub-game state is in the GG book sign. Usually, if it is any of CZ1 to CZ4 or GG, "0" is determined as the distribution number, and if the sub-game state is EG, SEG or PEG, "8" is determined as the distribution number.

<Distribution lottery table at the time of GG winning>
The GG winning distribution lottery table shown in FIG. 46 represents the probability that each GG continuation rate will be determined for each distribution number determined when the GG wins. In the present embodiment, the GG continuation rate is "1% continuation", "12.5% continuation", "25% continuation", "50% continuation", "67 continuation", "75% continuation" and "80 continuation". It is decided from "% continuation".

For example, when the distribution number is "8", "1% continuation" is determined with a probability of 32592/32768, "50% continuation" is determined with a probability of 128/32768, and "50% continuation" is determined with a probability of 32/32768. "67% continuation" is decided, and "75% continuation" is decided with a probability of 16/32768.

<CZHOLD lottery table>
The CZHOLD lottery table shown in FIG. 47 is for each of the roll group numbers 1 to 6 (that is, HOLD winning A7, HOLD winning AV, HOLD winning AS, HOLD winning B7, HOLD winning BV and HOLD winning BS). It represents the probability that "without HOLD" and "with HOLD" are determined respectively.

The CZHOLD lottery table shown in FIG. 47 is set so that when the roll group numbers are 1 to 3, there is no HOLD, and when the roll group numbers are 4 to 6, there is HOLD. However, it may be set so that "without HOLD" and "with HOLD" are distributed with a predetermined probability for each of the roll groups 1 to 6.

<GG winning rate lottery table after CZHOLD>
The GG winning rate lottery table after CZHOLD shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 shows the winning rate of GG in the next unit game when the sub-game state is any of CZ1 to CZ4 and the hold is won (that is, when there is HOLD). Represents.

Specifically, the GG winning rate lottery table after CZHOLD includes eight tables corresponding to the number groups A to the number group H. The GG winning rate lottery table after each CZHOLD represents the probability that the GG winning rate is determined for each sub-flag lottery combination. In the present embodiment, the winning rate of GG is determined from "20% winning", "25% winning", "33% winning", "50% winning" and "100% winning".

For example, in the number group A, when the sub-flag lottery combination is "CU bell", "25% winning" is determined with a probability of 30080/32768, and "33% winning" is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, 512. With a probability of / 32768, "50% win" is determined, and with a probability of 128/32768, "100% win" is determined.

<GG lottery table after CZHOLD>
In the GG lottery table after CZHOLD shown in FIG. 50, the non-winning of GG and the winning of GG are based on the winning rate of GG determined by referring to the GG winning rate lottery table after CZHOLD shown in FIGS. 48 and 49. It represents the probability of being determined. For example, when the GG continuation rate is "20% winning", the probability of GG being non-winning is 26215/32768 and the probability of GG being winning is 6553/32768.

<Rewind lottery table>
The rewinding lottery table shown in FIG. 51 represents the probability that the EG or PEG will be rewound when the sub-game state is EG, SEG or PEG.

The rewind lottery table includes three tables corresponding to EG, SEG and PEG. Each rewind lottery table represents the probability that an EG or PEG rewind will be determined for each subflag lottery.

For example, when the sub-game state is SEG and the sub-flag lottery combination is "C-rip", the rewinding is non-winning with a probability of 16384/32768 and the rewinding to the EG is with a probability of 8192/32768. Winning, and rewinding to PEG with a probability of 8192/32768 is winning.

<Distribution table at the time of rewinding winning>
The rewinding winning distribution table shown in FIG. 52 represents a distribution number for determining the continuation rate of the winning GG due to the winning rewinding.

The rewind winning sorting table includes three tables corresponding to EG, SEG and PEG. In each rewinding winning distribution table, a distribution number for distributing the GG continuation rate is associated with the number of remaining games in each sub-game state.

For example, if the number of remaining games in EG is 11G, "1" is determined as the distribution number, and if the number of remaining games in SEG is 11G, "2" is determined as the distribution number, and the number of remaining games in PEG is If it is 11G, "3" is determined as the distribution number.

<Distribution lottery table at the time of rewinding>
The rewinding winning distribution lottery table shown in FIG. 53 represents the probability that each GG continuation rate is determined for each distribution number determined when the rewinding is won.

For example, when the distribution number is "3", "1% continuation" is determined with a probability of 32256/32768, "50% continuation" is determined with a probability of 500/32768, and "50% continuation" is determined with a probability of 8/32768. "67% continuation" is decided, and "75% continuation" is decided with a probability of 4/32768.

<PEG promotion lottery table>
The PEG promotion table shown in FIG. 54 shows the probabilities of promoting the sub-game state from EG to PEG in the first unit game of the EG or the first unit game after rewinding to the EG when the sub-game state is EG. Represents.

Specifically, the PEG promotion lottery table determines the probability that the non-winning of PEG promotion and the PEG promotion will be determined with respect to the number of times the lottery for promotion from EG to PEG is performed when the sub-game state is EG. Represents.

For example, in the first unit game (first time) of EG, there is a probability of 32256/32768 that the PEG promotion is non-winning, and a probability of 512/32768 that the PEG promotion is winning. Further, in the first unit game (second and subsequent times) after rewinding to the EG, the PEG promotion is non-winning with a probability of 32640/32768, and the PEG promotion is won with a probability of 128/32768.

<GG continuation rate lottery table at the time of EG relief>
The GG continuation rate lottery table at the time of EG relief shown in FIG. 55 shows the probability that each GG continuation rate is determined when the GG is won at the time of EG relief. For example, "50% continuation" is determined with a probability of 3276 / 32768, and "75% continuation" is determined with a probability of 4/32768.

<SEG additional game number lottery table>
The SEG additional game number lottery table shown in FIG. 56 includes two tables, a table when there is no SEG stock and a table when there is SEG stock.

Each SEG additional game number lottery table notifies each sub-flag lottery combination of the non-winning of the additional SEG game number, the number of additional games (hereinafter, also referred to as "immediate notification") in the unit game, and It represents the probability that the number of additional games to be stocked will be determined. In the present embodiment, the number of additional games of SEG is determined from "10 games", "20 games", "30 games" and "1000 games".

For example, if there is no stock of SEG and the sub-flag lottery role is "C-rip", there is a probability of 24576/32768 that the game will be non-winning, and there is a probability of 6848/32768 that 10 games will be announced immediately. Twenty games that are immediately announced with a probability of 1024/32768 are determined, 30 games that are immediately announced with a probability of 256/32768 are determined, and 1000 games that are immediately announced with a probability of 64/32768 are determined. In this case, the number of additional games to be stocked is not determined.

<History lottery table>
The history lottery table shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 includes five tables corresponding to the normal, CZ1 and CZ2, CZ3 and CZ4, GG, and EG, SEG, and PEG sub-gaming states.

Each history lottery table represents the probability of winning GG and CZ1 to CZ4 for each history result. Here, the history results are "None", "History blue 3 stations", "History blue 4 stations", "History blue 5 stations", "History yellow 3 stations", "History yellow 4 stations", "History yellow 5 stations". "Ream", "History White 5 reams", "Special role 2 times within 5G", "Special role 3 times within 5G", "Special role 4 times within 5G", "Special role 5 times within 5G", It includes 16 results of "Red 7 twice or more within 5G", "Red 7 3 times or more within 5G", "Red 7 2 or more times" and "GOD 2 times or more within 5G".

Specifically, each history lottery table has "non-win", "GG win", "CZ1 win", "CZ2 win", "CZ3 win", "CZ4 win", "GG + CZ1" for each history result. It represents the probability of being determined as "winning".

For example, when the sub-game state is normal and the history result is "history blue triplet", "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 31130/32768 and "CZ1 winning" with a probability of 1638/32768. Is decided. Similarly, when the sub-game state is normal and the history result is "history blue 4 consecutive", "CZ1 winning" is determined with a probability of 32768/32768.

The history lottery table for EG, SEG and PEG shown in FIG. 58 is shown as a common table, but the history lottery table for PEG is more advantageous for the player than the other history lottery tables. It may be set so that the addition of GG is performed.

That is, the history lottery table for the sub-game state other than PEG may be set so that the GG is added more favorably to the player than the history lottery table for the sub-game state other than PEG.

Specifically, the history lottery table may be set so that the winning probability of GG and CZ is higher when the sub-game state is PEG than when the sub-game state is other than PEG. ..

[Main control processing]
The main CPU 93 of the main control board 41 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 59 to 72.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the main control process. The main control process described below starts when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 executes the power-on processing shown in FIG. 60 (S10). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup is normal, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization processing is executed according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the initialization process at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area, the display combination storage area, and the like of the main RAM 95 are cleared.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 61 (S12). In this medal reception / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by a player and a process of detecting a start operation are executed.

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts three random numbers (random values 1 to 3) and stores them in the random number storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S13). Here, the random number value 1 is a value used for the internal lottery process, and is extracted from 0 to 65535 in the present embodiment.

Further, the random number values 2 and 3 are values used for other lottery processing, and are extracted from 0 to 65535 and 0 to 255, respectively, in the present embodiment. It should be noted that the main CPU 93 does not have to always extract the random number values 2 and 3 in step S13, and may extract the random number values 2 and 3 only when the use occurs.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 62 (S14). The main CPU 93 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop initial setting process shown in FIG. 64 (S16). By this reel stop initial setting process, each information (for example, stop table number and the like) related to reel stop control is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S17).

The start command data represents, for example, the type of the game status flag, the value of the bonus end number counter, the type of the internal winning combination, the value of the timer for the effect, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the wait process (S18). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the previous game (the start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. Wait until the waiting time is exhausted. The predetermined time in this wait process, that is, the wait time is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel rotation start process for rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R according to the number of inserted medals (S19). Along with this reel rotation start process, "0000111" is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 29).

Further, the reel rotation start process is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71. This interrupt process is a process executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 ms). By this interrupt process, the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started.

After that, the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is controlled by this interrupt processing, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is accelerated until the constant speed is reached. Further, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R reaches a constant speed, the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C and 49R is controlled by this interrupt process so that the reels 3L, 3C and 3R rotate at a constant speed. Be maintained.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 ( S20).

By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub-control board 42 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority storage process shown in FIG. 65 (S21). In this attraction priority storage process, the attraction priority table selection process shown in FIG. 66 is executed, and the attraction priority of all the symbols of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined. That is, in the attraction priority storage process, the stop information is stored in the attraction priority data storage area shown in FIG. 31 for each symbol position of each rotating reel based on the internal winning combination.

For example, for each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, when the corresponding symbol is stop permission, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area based on the priority table, and the stop is not performed. In the case of permission (for example, when a winning combination that has not been won internally wins a prize), data indicating stop prohibition is stored in the attraction priority data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 68 (S22). By this process, the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R is performed. Next, the main CPU 93 executes the winning search process (S23).

In this winning search process, after all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the activated winning line is collated with the symbol combination table, and the symbol combination displayed on the winning line is displayed. Judged.

Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 26) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 13) are collated, and the collation result is stored in the display combination storage area. To.

More specifically, the data in the symbol code storage area is copied as it is to the display combination storage area. At that time, the symbol combination table is referred to, and the number of payouts is obtained. By this winning search process, the combination of the symbols displayed on the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is specified because all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the payout of the number of medals according to the displayed symbol combination based on the result of the winning search process (S25). Along with this medal payout process, the hopper device 43 is controlled and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S26). .. The winning operation command data represents, for example, the type of display combination, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the bonus end check process shown in FIG. 69 (S27). By this bonus end check process, the process of terminating the operation of BB or RB is executed when the end condition of BB or RB is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 70 (S28). By this bonus operation check process, the process of operating the BB or RB is executed based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The main CPU 93 executes the process of step S28 and then executes the process of step S11.

<Processing when power is turned on>
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a power-on processing executed in step S10 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 59.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S30). In this determination process, whether or not the backup is normal is determined by error detection using the checksum value.

For example, the main CPU 93 stores the set value of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value and the like as backup data in the main RAM 95 when the power is turned off, and the determination process (S30) when the power is turned on. In, the set value and the like and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95 are read out.

Here, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum calculated from the read set value and the like with the backed up checksum, and if the comparison results match, it is determined that the backup is normal.

When the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up setting value and the like (S31). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off will be set.

After executing the process of step S31, or when it is determined in step S30 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 has the setting change switch provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1 turned on. Whether or not it is determined (S32). Here, if it is determined that the setting change switch is on (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the initialization process at the time of setting change (S33).

In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 95 are cleared, and the set value is cleared.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S34). .. The initialization command data represents, for example, whether or not the set value has been changed, the set value, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the set value change process (S35). In this set value change process, for example, the set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and the set value selected when the start lever 16 is operated is determined.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in the ON state (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until a determination result in the non-ON state is obtained.

Here, when a determination result that the setting change switch is not in the ON state is obtained (NO), the main CPU 93 generates and generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42. The initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S37), and the power-on processing is completed.

In step S32, if it is determined that the setting change switch is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S38). Here, if it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 executes power-on error processing (S39).

In the power-on error processing, the main CPU 93 indicates that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like. In the state of an error (backup error) in which the backup is not normal, the main CPU 93 does not release the error state by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch, and the setting is newly changed. Only in case is the error state cleared.

If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 restores the state of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the state before the power was cut off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 95. (S40), the process at power-on ends.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG. 59.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic closing request (S50). If a player wins a replay role in the previous unit game, a medal is automatically inserted in this unit game. That is, in the determination process of step S50, it may be determined whether or not the replay combination has been won in the previous unit game.

In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic closing request (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the automatic closing process (S51). In the automatic insertion process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The transmission process is executed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data represents, for example, the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the insertion number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like.

In step S50, if it is determined that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), the main CPU 93 permits the acceptance of medals (S53). For example, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid of a selector (not shown) to form a path so that medals inserted into the medal insertion port 13 pass through the selector.

In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the acceptance of medals has been prohibited since the previous unit game, so that the process related to the acceptance of medals Does not run.

After the process of step S52 or S53 is executed, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals according to the gaming state (S54). In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals inserted is 3.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the acceptance of medals is permitted (S55). Here, if it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a medal insertion check process for checking the number of inserted medals (S56). In this medal insertion check process, the value of the insertion number counter is updated according to the number of checked medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The transmission process is executed (S57).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited (S58). In the present embodiment, the condition is satisfied on the condition that the number of inserted cards is 3 and the credit is 50, or the automatic insertion process of step S51 is executed. Sometimes it is determined that medals cannot be inserted or credited, and when the conditions are not met, it is determined that medals can be inserted or credited.

If it is determined in step S58 that medals cannot be inserted or credited (NO), the main CPU 93 prohibits acceptance of medals (S59). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a path through which medals inserted into the medal insertion port 13 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 21 without driving the solenoid of the selector.

In step S55, when it is determined that the acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), in step S58, when it is determined that medals can be inserted or credited (YES), or after the process of step S59 is executed. , The main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number of medals that can start the game (S60).

That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number of medals that can start the unit game according to the game state. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is three.

Here, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the number that can start the game (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S55. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the number of medals that can start the game (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 64 is on (S61).

Here, if it is determined that the start switch 64 is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S55. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 64 is on (YES), the main CPU 93 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S62) and ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG. 59.

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state in the main RAM 95 (S80). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table shown in any of FIGS. 17 to 19 in the main RAM 95 according to the gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S81). Next, the main CPU 93 determines the internal winning combination based on the acquired random number value and the set internal lottery table, and stores the internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S82).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 27) is “0” (S83). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the bit 7 corresponding to the "BB" of the carry-over storage area is set to "1".

If it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES), the main CPU 93 uses the internal winning combination specified as the carry-over combination among the internal winning combination stored in the internal winning combination storage area. The combination (for example, BB) is stored in the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 27) (S84). In the process of step S83, for example, when "BB" is acquired as the internal winning combination, the bit 7 corresponding to the "BB" of the carry-over combination storage area is set to "1".

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 27) is “0” (S85). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the bit 7 corresponding to the "BB" of the carry-over storage area is set to "1".

If it is determined in step S85 that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the game state flag transition process (S76) shown in FIG. 63, and ends the internal lottery process.

<Game status flag transition process>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the game state flag transition process executed in step S86 of the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 62.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 27) (S90). In this process, it is determined whether or not the bit 7 corresponding to the “BB” of the carry-over storage area is set to “1”.

If it is determined in step S90 that the BB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT gaming state (S91). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the bit 4 corresponding to the “RT1 game state” of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 28) to “1”. After executing the process of step S91, the main CPU 93 ends the game state flag transition process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90 that the BB is not stored in the carry-over combination storage area (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game state flag transition process.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a reel stop initial setting process executed in step S16 of the main control process shown in FIG. 59.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table, and acquires the rotation cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination or the like (S100). The rotating cylinder stop initial setting table is a table in which various information used for stop control is specified in association with the number of input sheets and the rotating cylinder stop number corresponding to the internal winning combination.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the rotating cylinder stop number (S101). In this process, the main CPU 93 has, for example, the number of the stop table used at the time of the first to third stops and the information necessary for performing the control change in the control change process (that is, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are in a specific order. (Information used to reselect the stop table when stopped (or pressed) at a specific position) and the like are acquired.

Information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position is directly or indirectly stored in the stop table, and the limit that does not give a disadvantage to the player and does not cause an erroneous prize by using this information. Is configured to stop at the stop position intended by the developer.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 26) (S102). That is, the main CPU 93 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to "1".

Next, the main CPU 93 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S103), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95.

<Retract priority storage process>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the pull-in priority storage process executed in step S21 of the main control process shown in FIG. 59 and step S165 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 68.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 95 (S110). Next, the main CPU 93 executes a search target reel determination process for determining a search target reel (S111). In this process, for example, one reel on the left side of the rotating reels is determined as the reel to be searched.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority table selection process shown in FIG. 66 (S112). In this attraction priority table selection process, one attraction priority table number is selected from the attraction priority table (see FIG. 21).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets 20 (the number of symbols on each reel) to the number of symbol checks stored in the main RAM 95, and sets 0 to the search symbol position (S113).

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the symbol code storage process shown in FIG. 67 (S114). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 25) based on the acquired symbol code and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 26) (S115). Next, the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority data acquisition process (S116).

In the pull-in priority data acquisition process, in step S112, the corresponding bit is 1 in the display combination storage area and the corresponding bit is 1 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 24). Refer to the selected pull-in priority table to get the pull-in priority data.

In the pull-in priority data acquisition process, "stop prohibition" (000H) is set for the symbol position that will result in an erroneous winning when stopped, and although it is not internally won, no erroneous winning will occur even if it is stopped. For the symbol position, "stoppable" (001H) is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area corresponding to the search target reel (S117). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks and adds 1 to the search symbol position (S118).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S119). Here, if it is determined that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S114.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of symbol checks is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search for the number of searches has been executed (S120). Here, if it is determined that the search for the number of searches has been executed (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the search for the number of searches has not been executed (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S111.

<Pull-in priority table selection process>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the attraction priority table selection process executed in step S112 of the attraction priority storage process shown in FIG. 65.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S130). Here, when it is determined that the attraction priority table selection data is set (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 30) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 29). Then, from the pull-in priority table selection table (not shown), set the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection data (S131), and set the pull-in priority table according to the pull-in priority table number (S131). S132), the pull-in priority table selection process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the attraction priority table selection data is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the attraction priority table according to the attraction priority table number (S132), and the attraction priority table The selection process ends.

<Design code storage process>
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the symbol code storage process executed in step S114 of the pull-in priority order storage process shown in FIG. 65 and step S159 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 68.

First, the main CPU 93 sets the valid line data (S140). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 sets the center line as an effective line. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S141). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 sets the symbol position in the middle stage of the left reel 3L as the symbol position data for checking.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S142), and ends the symbol code storage process.

<Reel stop control process>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed in step S22 of the main control process shown in FIG. 59.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S150). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. If the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S150.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 30) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 30) according to the pressed stop button. 29) and is updated (S151).

Here, the main CPU 93 stores the types of operation stop buttons corresponding to the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation in the press order delivery area (see FIG. 30), and the press order delivery area. The pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R can be determined by referring to.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S152), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S153), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S152). S154). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the sliding piece number determination process (S155). In this sliding piece number determination process, the number of sliding pieces defined at the stop start position is determined based on the stop table selection data group selected based on the internal winning combination from the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table (see FIG. 20). It is a process to do.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The transmission process is executed (S156). This reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of slip pieces determination data, and stores the stop schedule position in the main RAM 95 (S157). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of the predetermined numerical values "0" to "4" defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Is.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S158). Next, the main CPU 93 executes the symbol code storage process shown in FIG. 67 (S159).

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S160). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S161). In this control change process, the reel stop information group is updated when it is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S162). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

If the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S162. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop command transmission process (S163).

The reel stop command generated by this reel stop command transmission process includes information on the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch 7S. The ON edge / OFF edge information may be monitored by an interrupt process and transmitted to the sub-control board 42.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S164). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority storage process shown in FIG. 65 (S165), and executes the process of step S150. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process.

<Bonus end check process>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process executed in step S27 of the main control process shown in FIG. 58.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the main game state is the BB operating state, that is, whether the BB operating state flag stored in the game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 28 is on (S280).

Here, if it is determined that the main game state is not the BB operating state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main game state is the BB operating state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the bonus end number counter (S281). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is smaller than "0" (S282).

Here, when the value of the bonus end number counter is smaller than "0" (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the BB end process of turning off the BB operation state flag (S283).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the RT0 gaming state as the RT gaming state (S284). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the bit 5 corresponding to the “RT0 game state” of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 28) to “1”.

After that, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated bonus end command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The process is executed (S285), and the bonus end check process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S282, when the value of the bonus end number counter is not smaller than "0", that is, when the value of the bonus end number counter is "0" or more (NO), the main CPU 93 is the winning count counter and The value of the playable number counter is subtracted by "1" (step S286).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the values of the winning count counter and the playable count counter are “0” (step S287). If the values of the winning count counter and the playable count counter are not "0", the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

On the other hand, when the values of the winning number counter and the playable number counter are "0", the main CPU 93 executes the RB end process of turning off the RB operation state flag (step S289), and the bonus end check process. To finish.

<Bonus operation check process>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process executed in step S28 of the main control process shown in FIG. 59.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the BB gaming state (S290). Here, when it is determined that the main gaming state is the BB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RB is operating (step S291).

If it is determined that the RB is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RB is not operating (NO), the RB operation process for operating the RB is executed (step S292), and the bonus operation check process is terminated. In the RB operation process, the main CPU 93 turns on the RB game status flag, sets "1" in the winning count counter, and sets "1" in the playable counter.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S290 that the main gaming state is not the BB gaming state (NO), the combination of "lower half circle-upper half circle-blue 7A" corresponding to "BB" is effective for the main CPU 93. It is determined whether or not it is displayed along the line (step S293).

When it is determined that the combination of "lower semicircle-upper semicircle-blue 7A" corresponding to "BB" is displayed along the effective line (YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB operation process for operating the BB. Execute (step S292). In the BB operation process, the main CPU 93 turns on the BB game state flag and sets a predetermined number (for example, 86) in the bonus end number counter. At this time, the main CPU 93 also performs the above-mentioned RB operation process.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S295). After that, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated bonus start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The process is executed (S296), and the bonus operation check process is completed.

On the other hand, in step S293, if it is determined that the combination of "lower half circle-upper half circle-blue 7A" corresponding to "BB" is not displayed along the effective line (NO), either replay is performed. Is determined whether or not is displayed (step S297).

If it is determined that any of the replays is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the replays is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 makes an automatic insertion request so that the automatic insertion process is executed in S51 of the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. (S298), the bonus operation check process is completed.

<Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93. This process is performed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 93 executes the input port check process shown in FIG. 72 (S321). In this process, the main CPU 93 confirms the presence or absence of a signal transmitted to the sub-control board 42.

For example, the main CPU 93 stores input state command data representing on-edge and off-edge information of various switches including on-edge and off-edge of the start switch 64 and stop switch 7S in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the timer update process (S322). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes the effect timer update process (S323). Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel control process for controlling the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (S324).

More specifically, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in response to the request to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, that is, the start operation, and the reels at a constant speed. Control is performed so that the 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate. Further, the main CPU 93 controls so that the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the stop operation are stopped in response to the stop operation.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the lamp 7SEG drive process (S325). For example, the main CPU 93 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Next, the main CPU 93 restores the register (S326) and ends the interrupt process that occurs periodically.

<Input port check process>
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93.

First, the main CPU 93 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the state of the input port before the previous interrupt, that is, one interrupt, in the main RAM 95 (S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 95 (S332).

In this way, by making it possible to compare the state of the input port one interrupt before and the state of the current input port, the main CPU 93 can confirm the state of both input ports. It is checked whether the state of the input port has changed, for example, whether the MAX bet button 14 or the 1-bet button 15 has been pressed.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 95 (S333). In the present embodiment, the on-edge means a state in which the button is held down, and the off-edge means a state in which the button is released.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates input state command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42, and stores the generated input state command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The transmission process is executed (S334), and the input port check process is completed.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub CPU 102 of the sub control board 42 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 73 to 110.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU 102 when the power is turned on.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization process (S350). In this process, the sub CPU 102 checks for errors in the sub RAM 103 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, which is a task group for timer interrupt synchronization, a sound control task, and a mother task, which is a task group for VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interruption synchronization.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 74 (S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive the timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, the lamp control task of various lamps. It is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 75 (S352). In the sound control task, the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task (S353) and ends the power-on process. The mother task is a task group for VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization, and is a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when one frame of video is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is used.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in step S351 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 73.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the timer interrupt initialization process (S360). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization process of the lamp-related data (S361).

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the timer interrupt wait (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 102 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

As a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization can be mentioned. In addition, a task group for power interrupt synchronization (not shown), a task group for door monitoring unit communication synchronization (not shown), and the like can be mentioned.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 75 (S363). In this process, the task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group, which is the same group as the lamp control task, is executed.

In the present embodiment, the priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group is basically in the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task having the next priority after the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, among the sound control tasks shown in FIG. 75, the processes of steps S372 and S373 are executed.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the lamp data analysis process (S364), executes the lamp effect execution process (S365), and executes the process of step S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a sound control task activated in step S352 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 73.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of sound-related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a task having the next priority in the timer interrupt synchronization task group, which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound data analysis process (S372), performs the sound effect execution process (S373), and executes the process of step S371.

<Mother task>
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a mother task activated in step S353 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 73.

In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (S380), activates the main board communication task (S381), and activates the animation task (S382).

<Main task>
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main task started in step S380 of the mother task shown in FIG. 76.

In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes the VSYNC interrupt initialization process (S390) and executes the VSYNC interrupt wait (S391). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the drawing process (S392), and executes the process of step S391.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task activated in step S381 of the mother task shown in FIG. 76.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S400) and checks the reception command (S401).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a valid command has been received (S402). Here, if it is determined that a valid command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of step S401.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a valid command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 creates game information from the received command and stores the created game information in the sub RAM 103 (S403). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 79 (S404), and executes the process of step S401.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed in step S404 of the main board communication task shown in FIG. 78.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 81 (S410), executes the lamp data determination process (S411), executes the sound data determination process (S412), and registers the determined data. Then (S413), the command analysis process is terminated.

<Anime task>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an animation task activated in step S382 of the mother task shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the change from the previous game information (S420). Specifically, in the sub CPU 102, the current game information updated by the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 shown in FIG. 71 is different from the game information registered in the sub RAM 103 in the previous interrupt process. Check if the game information is different.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the object control process (S421). Specifically, when the check result that the game information is changed is obtained in step S420, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change of the game information.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes the animation task management process (S422). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects. When the sub CPU 102 executes the animation task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of step S420.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process executed in step S410 of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 79.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the initialization command has been received (S430). Here, if it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization command reception processing (S431), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the initialization command reception processing, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command including the presence / absence of the change of the set value and the information of the set value is set in the sub RAM 103.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S432). Here, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the medal insertion command reception processing (S433), and ends the effect content determination process.

In the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command including the presence / absence of medal insertion and the values of the insertion number counter and the credit counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start command has been received (S434). Here, if it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the start command reception time process shown in FIG. 82 (S435), and ends the effect content determination process.

In the process when the start command is received, for example, the type of the game status flag, the value of the bonus end number counter, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the flag related to the lock, the value of the effect timer, etc. are transmitted as the start command. The production data based on the information is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S436). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel rotation start command reception processing (S437), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception processing, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command indicating that the reel rotation has started is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S438). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel stop command reception time process (S439) shown in FIG. 88, and ends the effect content determination process.

In the reel stop command reception processing, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command including the type of the stop reel, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the scheduled stop position), and the like are set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S440). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command (S441), and ends the effect content determination process.

In the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set including the type of display combination, the flag related to the lock, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S442). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the bonus start command reception processing (S443), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command indicating that the bonus has been started is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S444). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the bonus end command reception processing (S445), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command indicating that the bonus has ended is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input state command has been received (S446). Here, if it is determined that the input state command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the input state command reception processing (S447), and ends the effect content determination process.

In the input state command reception processing, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the input state command indicating whether each operation unit is in the on-edge state or the off-edge state is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in S446 that the input state command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when receiving start command>
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a start command reception time process executed in step S435 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 81.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the BB carry-over state (S450). Here, if it is determined that the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is not the BB carry-over state (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the BB carry-over state (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the lottery preprocessing shown in FIG. 83 (S451).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is any of CZ1 and CZ4 (S452). Here, if it is determined that the sub-game state is any of CZ1 to CZ4 (YES), the sub-CPU 102 executes the CZ intermediate processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 (S453).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is neither CZ1 to CZ4 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is EG (S454). Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is EG (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the EG processing shown in FIGS. 93 to 95 (S455).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not EG (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is SEG (S456). Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is SEG (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the SEG processing shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 (S457).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not SEG (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is PEG (S458). Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is PEG (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the PEG processing shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 (S459).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not PEG (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is GG (S460). Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is GG (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the GG processing shown in FIG. 100 (S461). On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not GG (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the common process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 (S462).

After executing the processes of steps S453, S455, S457, S459, S461 or S462b, the sub CPU 102 executes the common lottery process shown in FIG. 107 (S463) and executes the post-lottery process shown in FIG. 108 (S464). , Ends processing when a start command is received.

<Lottery pre-processing>
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the lottery preprocessing executed in step S451 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 82.

First, the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state representing the sub game state determined in the previous game as the sub game state (S470). Next, the sub CPU 102 clears the CZ hold GG winning flag (S472).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is EG (S473). Here, if it is determined that the sub-game state is not EG (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the EG relief flag (S474).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is EG (YES), or after the process of step S474 is executed, the sub CPU 102 sets the main flag corresponding number corresponding to the internal winning combination to the sub-flag corresponding to the sub-game state. Along with converting to a conversion number, a sub-flag conversion process of converting the sub-flag conversion number into a sub-flag lottery number for lottery is performed (S475).

In the flag conversion process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub-flag conversion table shown in FIG. 32, specifies the sub-flag conversion number associated with the main flag corresponding number, and the sub-flag state-specific conversion table shown in FIGS. 33 to 39. The sub-flag conversion number is converted by lottery with a probability according to the sub-game state.

Further, in the flag conversion process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub-flag lottery conversion table shown in FIG. 40 and specifies the sub-flag lottery number associated with the sub-flag conversion number.

After executing the process of S475, the sub CPU 102 executes the CZ counter process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 (S476). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG precursor games representing the number of unit games from winning the GG to activating the GG is 0 or more (S477).

Here, when it is determined that the number of GG precursor games is 0 or more, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of GG precursor games (S478). When it is determined in step S477 that the number of GG precursor games is not 0 or more, or after executing the process of step S478, the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery pre-process.

<CZ counter processing>
84 and 85 are flowcharts showing the CZ counter processing executed in step S476 of the lottery preprocessing shown in FIG. 83.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the first game of CZ1 to CZ4, GG, EG, SEG, or PEG (S480). Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is the first game of CZ1 to CZ4, GG, EG, SEG or PEG (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the CZ precursor counter during normal operation (for example, The value is set to "-1" (S481), and the number of CZ precursor games in GG is initialized (for example, "-1" is set) (S482).

In step S480, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not the first game of CZ1 to CZ4, GG, EG, SEG or PEG (NO), or after executing the process of step S482, the sub CPU 102 normally performs CZ. It is determined whether or not the value of this precursor counter is 0 (S483).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the normal medium CZ precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the normal medium CZ precursor counter is 1 or more (S484). .. When it is determined that the value of the CZ precursor counter is 1 or more during normal operation (YES), the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of 0 or 1 (that is, the sub flag conversion role name is lost or "bell spilled"). Whether or not it is determined (S485).

In step S483, when it is determined that the value of the CZ precursor counter during normal operation is 0 (YES), or when it is determined in step S485 that the sub-flag conversion number is 0 or 1 (YES), the sub The CPU 102 causes the CZ precursor counter to subtract one value during normal operation (S486).

In step S484, when it is determined that the value of the CZ precursor counter during normal operation is not 1 or more (NO), in step S485, it is determined that the subflag conversion number is neither 0 nor 1 (NO), or step. After executing the process of S486, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of CZ precursor games in the GG is 0 or more (S487).

Here, when it is determined that the number of CZ precursor games in GG is 0 or more (YES), whether or not the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion role name is “GOD”). Is determined (S488). Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of CZ precursor games during normal operation (S489).

In step S487, when it is determined that the number of CZ precursor games in GG is not 0 or more (NO), in step S488, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is 25 (YES), or the process of step S489 is executed. After that, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is normal (S490).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is normal (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ1 or CZ2 is present in the CZ information stock (S491). When it is determined that there is CZ1 or CZ2 in the CZ information stock (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG precursor games is 0 or more (S492).

If it is determined in step S492 that the number of GG precursor games is not 0 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the precursor of CZ1 or CZ2 (S493).

Here, when it is determined that the CZ1 or CZ2 is not in the precursor (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the normal medium CZ precursor counter lottery to determine the value of the normal medium CZ precursor counter by lottery (S494).

In the normal medium CZ precursor counter lottery, for example, the sub CPU 102 randomly determines one value from the range 1-16. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the normal middle CZ precursor counter lottery to the normal middle CZ precursor counter (S495).

In step S490, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not normal (NO), in step S491, when it is determined that there is neither CZ1 nor CZ2 in the CZ information stock (NO), in step S492, the number of GG precursor games. When it is determined that is 0 or more (YES), when it is determined in step S493 that it is in the precursor of CZ1 or CZ2 (YES), or after the process of step S495 is executed, the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game. It is determined whether or not the state is GG (S496).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-game state is not GG (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ counter processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is GG (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is CZ3 or CZ4 in the CZ information stock (S497).

When it is determined that there is no CZ3 or CZ4 in the CZ information stock (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is "GOD") (S498). .. Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the precursor of CZ3 or CZ4 (S499).

If it is determined that the CZ3 or CZ4 is not in the precursor (NO), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of CZ precursor games in the GG to draw the number of CZ precursor games in the GG (S500). In the CZ precursor game number lottery during GG, for example, the sub CPU 102 randomly determines one value from the range of 1 to 32. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the lottery for the number of CZ precursor games in GG to the number of CZ precursor games in GG (S501).

In step S496, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not GG (NO), in step S497, when it is determined that there is neither CZ3 nor CZ4 in the CZ information stock (NO), the sub-flag conversion number is 25 in step S498. (YES), if it is determined in step S499 that it is in the precursor of CZ3 or CZ4 (YES), or after executing the process of step S501, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ counter process. To do.

<Processing during CZ>
86 and 87 are flowcharts showing the CZ processing executed in step S453 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 82.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the common processing shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 (S510). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of CZ lottery games is an initial value (for example, “-1”) (S511).

When it is determined that the number of CZ lottery games is the initial value (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets 5 to the number of CZ lottery games (S512). Next, the sub CPU 102 clears (disables) the CZ hold flag (S513).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is CZ3 or CZ4 (S514). Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is CZ3 or CZ4 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining games of GG (hereinafter, simply referred to as "the number of remaining GG games") is 0 or more. Is determined (S515).

Here, if it is determined that the number of remaining GG games is 0 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the number of remaining GG games (S516). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remaining GG games is not 0 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets 1 to the number of remaining GG games (S517).

In step S511, when it is determined that the number of CZ lottery games is not the initial value (NO), in step S514, when it is determined that the sub-game state is neither CZ3 nor CZ4 (NO), or in step S516 or S517. After the processing is completed, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ hold flag is valid (S518).

Here, if it is determined that the CZ hold flag is not valid (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of CZ lottery games is 0 (S519). Here, if it is determined that the number of CZ lottery games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during CZ. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of CZ lottery games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of CZ lottery games (S520).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is “GOD”) (S521). Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 has any one of the sub-flag conversion numbers 22 to 24 (that is, the sub-flag conversion role names are "right red 7" and "red 7N". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not it is "Red 7SP" (hereinafter, also collectively referred to as "Red 7") (S522).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 22 to 24 (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ number group lottery table shown in FIG. 41 and is in the sub-game state (CZ1 to CZ4). A CZ number group lottery for determining a number group by lottery is performed with a probability corresponding to either) and the sub-flag lottery number (S523), and the number group resulting from the CZ number group lottery is saved in the subRAM 103 (S524). , CZ processing is completed.

If it is determined in step S521 that the sub-flag conversion number is 25 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the GG in the next game state (S525). If it is determined in step S522 that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), or after executing the process of step S525, the sub CPU 102 clears the number of CZ lottery games to the initial value (). S526), the CZ hold flag is cleared (S527), and the CZ processing is completed.

If it is determined in step S518 that the CZ hold flag is valid (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is "GOD") (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is "GOD"). S528).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 has a sub-flag conversion number of 22 to 24 (that is, the sub-flag conversion role name is "red 7", "red 7N", or It is determined whether or not it is "Red 7SP") (S529).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 22 to 24 (NO), the sub CPU 102 is stored in the sub RAM 103 in the GG winning rate lottery table after CZHOLD shown in FIGS. 48 and 49. After CZHOLD, the GG winning rate lottery table is referred to, and the GG winning rate is determined by lottery with the probability associated with the sub-flag lottery number. After CZHOLD, the GG winning rate lottery is performed (S530), and after CZHOLD. GG winning rate The CZGG hold winning rate representing the result of the lottery is set in the sub RAM 103 (S531).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the GG lottery table after CZHOLD shown in FIG. 50, and performs the GG lottery after CZHOLD to determine the winning of GG by lottery with the probability associated with the GG winning rate after CZHOLD (S532). .. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the GG or EG has been won by the GG lottery after CZHOLD (S533).

Here, if it is determined that neither GG nor EG has been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during CZ, while if it is determined that neither GG nor EG has been won (NO). YES), the sub CPU 102 determines all stop rolls, that is, the types of all decorative symbols (S534).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ roll group conversion table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, and executes a CZ roll group conversion process for specifying the roll group number associated with all stopped rolls. (S535).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional GG counters to be added to the value of the GG counter according to the outcome group number (S536). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional GG counters to 5 when the outcome group number is 9 or 10, and when the outcome group number is other than 9 or 10, the GG is won. , Determines the number of additional GG counters to 1.

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of added GG counters to the value of the GG counter (S537). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a GG winning distribution lottery to distribute the GG continuation rate (S538).

In the GG winning time distribution lottery, the sub CPU 102 refers to the GG winning time distribution table shown in FIG. 45, specifies the distribution number associated with the game state and the sub flag lottery number, and identifies the distribution number associated with the GG winning time distribution number, and shows the GG winning time shown in FIG. With reference to the distribution lottery table, the GG continuation rate is determined by lottery with the probability associated with the distribution number.

Next, the sub CPU 102 stocks the GG continuation rate determined by the GG winning distribution lottery in the sub RAM 103 (S539). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the EG has been won (S540). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines that the EG has been won if the outcome group number is 11, and determines that the EG has not been won if the outcome group number is other than 11.

When the sub CPU 102 determines that the EG has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the EG in the CZ hold GG winning flag (S541), and ends the processing during CZ. On the other hand, if it is determined that the EG has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ hold GG winning flag to the GG (S542), and ends the CZ processing process.

If it is determined in step S528 that the sub-flag conversion number is 25 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the GG in the next game state (S543). When it is determined in step S528 that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), or after executing the process of step S543, the sub CPU 102 clears the number of CZ lottery games (S544). , The CZ hold flag is cleared (S545), and the processing during CZ is terminated.

<Processing when receiving reel stop command>
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a reel stop command reception time process executed in step S439 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 81.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is any of CZ1 to CZ4 (S560). Here, if it is determined that the sub-game state is neither CZ1 to CZ4 (NO), the sub-CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is any of CZ1 to CZ4 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command indicates the stop of the first stop reel or the second stop reel. Judgment (S561).

Here, when it is determined that the reel stop command indicates the stop of the first stop reel or the second stop reel (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the 1-stop and 2-stop processing shown in FIG. 89 (YES). S562), the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel stop command does not indicate the stop of the first stop reel or the second stop reel (NO), that is, when it is determined that the reel stop command indicates the stop of the third stop reel. The sub CPU 102 executes the three stop processing shown in FIGS. 90 to 92 (S563), and ends the reel stop command reception processing.

<Processing at 1st stop and 2nd stop>
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the 1st stop and 2nd stop processing executed in step S561 of the reel stop command reception processing shown in FIG. 88.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the BB carry-over state (S570). Here, if it is determined that the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is not the BB carry-over state (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the 1st stop and 2nd stop processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the BB carry-over state (YES), the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is “GOD”). Is determined (S571).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is 25 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the 1-stop and 2-stop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not 25 (NO), the sub-flag conversion number is any one of 22 to 24 (that is, the sub-flag conversion role name is "right red 7", "red 7N" or "red 7SP". ) (S572).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the 1st stop and 2nd stop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 22 to 24 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ hold flag is valid (S573).

Here, if it is determined that the CZ hold flag is valid (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the 1st stop and 2nd stop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the CZ hold flag is not valid (NO), the sub CPU 102 has the first stop, no second stop mirror, and the second stop included in the CZ roll group lottery table shown in FIG. 42. Refer to the corresponding table among the tables with a mirror for stopping, and perform a CZ roll group lottery to determine the type of decorative symbol by lottery with a probability associated with the number group saved in the sub RAM 103 in the CZ middle processing ( S574).

Next, when the reel stop command indicates the stop of the first stop reel, the sub CPU 102 determines the left stop roll, which is the decorative symbol on the left, as the result of the CZ roll group lottery, and the reel stop command is the first. When indicating the stop of the 2 stop reel, the middle stop roll, which is the decorative symbol inside, is determined as the result of the CZ roll group lottery (S575), and the processing at the time of 1 stop and 2 stops is completed.

In step S575, as shown in FIG. 112, when a decorative symbol other than the "mirror" is fixed as the middle stop roll, if the "mirror" is fixed as the left stop roll, the sub CPU 102 Changes the left stop roll to the same type of decorative pattern as the middle stop roll.

<3 stop processing>
90 to 92 are flowcharts showing the three stop processing executed in step S562 of the reel stop command reception processing shown in FIG. 88.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the BB carry-over state (S580). Here, if it is determined that the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is not the BB carry-over state (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the three stop processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the BB carry-over state (YES), the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is “GOD”). (S581).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is 25 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the three stop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not 25 (NO), the sub-flag conversion number is any one of 22 to 24 (that is, the sub-flag conversion role name is "right red 7", "red 7N" or "red 7SP". ) (S582).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the three stop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 22 to 24 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ hold flag is valid (S583).

Here, when it is determined that the CZ hold flag is not valid (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the table for the third stop included in the CZ roll group lottery table shown in FIG. 42, and performs processing during CZ. In (S584), a CZ roll group lottery is performed in which the type of the decorative symbol is determined by lottery with a probability associated with the number group stored in the subRAM 103.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the right stop roll, which is the right decorative symbol, based on the result of the CZ roll group lottery (S585). In step S585, as shown in FIG. 113, when the right stop roll is confirmed and the "mirror" is confirmed as the left stop roll and the middle stop roll, the sub CPU 102 is left. Change the stop roll and the middle stop roll to the same type of decorative pattern as the right stop roll.

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ roll group conversion table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, and specifies the types of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, that is, the roll group numbers corresponding to the displayed rolls. CZ roll group conversion process is executed (S586).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines which of the roll group numbers 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the roll group wins the hold (S587). Here, if it is determined that the hold has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZHOLD lottery table shown in FIG. 47, and has a probability of being associated with the outcome group number. A CZHOLD lottery is performed (S588).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the CZHOLD lottery has a hold (S589). Here, if it is determined that the result of the CZHOLD lottery has a hold (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ hold flag (S590) and ends the three stop processing.

If it is determined in step S587 that the hold has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines which of the roll group numbers 7 to 11, that is, whether or not the GG has been won (S591). ..

Here, if it is determined that the GG has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional GG counters to be added to the value of the GG counter according to the outcome group number (S592). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional GG counters to 5 when the outcome group number is 9 or 10, and the addition GG when the outcome group number is 7, 8 or 11. Determine the number of counters to 1.

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of added GG counters to the value of the GG counter (S593). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a GG winning distribution lottery to distribute the GG continuation rate (S594).

Next, the sub CPU 102 stocks the GG continuation rate determined by the GG winning distribution lottery in the sub RAM 103 (S595). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the roll group number is 7, that is, whether or not the roll group is the GG winning reach (S596).

Here, if it is determined that the GG winning reach is reached (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ reach flag (S597). On the other hand, if it is determined that the GG winning reach is not reached (NO), 0 is set in the number of CZ lottery games (S598).

If it is determined in step S583 that the CZ hold flag is valid (YES), the sub CPU 102 clears the CZ hold flag (S599) and determines whether or not the CZ hold GG winning flag is EG. (S600).

Here, when it is determined that the CZ hold GG winning flag is not EG (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ hold GG winning flag is GG (S601).

If it is determined in step S600 that the CZ hold GG winning flag is EG (YES), or if it is determined in step S601 that the CZ hold GG winning flag is GG (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines. Set 0 to the number of CZ lottery games (S602).

In step S589, when it is determined that the result of the CZ hold lottery does not have a hold (NO), in step S591 it is determined that the GG has not been won (NO), and in step S601, the CZ hold GG winning flag is GG. If it is determined that this is not the case (NO), and after executing the process of steps S597, S598 or S602, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of CZ lottery games is 0 (S603).

Here, if it is determined that the number of CZ lottery games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at 3 stops. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of CZ lottery games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ hold GG winning flag is EG (S604).

Here, when it is determined that the CZ hold GG winning flag is not EG (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the outcome group number is 11, that is, whether or not the EG is won. (S605).

If it is determined in step S604 that the CZ hold GG winning flag is EG (YES), or if it is determined in step S605 that the EG is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to EG. Is set to (S606), and the processing at 3 stops is completed.

If it is determined in step S605 that the EG has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is CZ3 or CZ4 (S607). Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is CZ3 or CZ4 (YES), the sub-CPU 102 sets the next game state to GG (S608) and ends the three stop processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is neither CZ3 nor CZ4 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the GG counter is 1 or more (S609).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the GG counter is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of CZ information stocks is 1 or more (S610). Here, when it is determined that the number of CZ information stocks is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal medium CZ precursor counter lottery (S611), and the result of the normal medium CZ precursor counter lottery is normally performed. Set to the CZ precursor counter (S612).

When it is determined in step S610 that the number of CZ information stocks is not 1 or more (NO), or after executing the process of step S612, the sub CPU 102 normally sets the next game state (S613) and stops at 3 stops. End the time processing.

If it is determined in step S609 that the value of the GG counter is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ reach flag is valid (S614).

Here, if it is determined that the CZ reach flag is not valid (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the roll group number is any of 8 to 11, that is, the roll group is the GG winning reach. It is determined whether or not the GG win is excluding the eyes (S615).

Here, if it is determined that the outcome group is not a GG winning except for the GG winning reach (NO), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of GG precursor games to determine the number of GG precursor games by lottery (S616). ). In the GG book precursor game number lottery, for example, the sub CPU 102 randomly determines one value from the range of 1 to 32.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the lottery for the number of GG precursor games to the number of GG precursor games (S617). Next, the sub CPU 102 normally sets the next game state (S618), and ends the three stop processing.

When it is determined in step S614 that the CZ reach flag is valid (YES), or when it is determined in step S615 that the outcome group is a GG winning excluding the GG winning reach (YES), The sub CPU 102 sets the number of GG precursor games to 0 (S619). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to GG (S620) and ends the three stop processing.

<Treatment during EG>
93 to 95 are flowcharts showing the EG processing executed in step S455 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 82.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of EG games is the initial value (S640). Here, when it is determined that the number of EG games is the initial value (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG games is the initial value (S641).

When it is determined that the number of GG games is the initial value (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of GG games to 100 (S642) and subtracts 1 from the value of the GG counter (S643).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of GG games is not the initial value (NO), or after executing the process of step S643, the sub CPU 102 refers to the PEG promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 54 and the number of lottery in the EG. A PEG promotion lottery is performed to determine by lottery whether or not to promote the sub-game state from EG to PEG with a probability associated with (S644).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is determined to promote the sub-game state from EG to PEG based on the result of the PEG promotion lottery, that is, whether or not the PEG is won (S645).

Here, when it is determined that the PEG has been won (YES), the sub-game state is set to PEG (S646), and the next game state is also set to PEG (S647). Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of PEG games (S648), executes the PEG processing shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 (S649), and ends the EG processing.

If it is determined in step S645 that the PEG has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of EG games to 16 (S650). When it is determined in step S640 that the number of EG games is not the initial value (NO), or after the processing in step S650 is completed, the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number 19 to 25 (that is, a sub flag conversion combination name). Is "right red 7F", "red 7F1", "red 7F2", "right red 7", "red 7N", "red 7SP" or "GOD") (S651).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 19 to 25 (YES), the sub CPU 102 clears the EG rescue flag (S652). If it is determined in step S651 that the sub-flag conversion number is not any of 19 to 25 (NO), or after executing the process of step S652, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of EG games (S653). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the common process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 (S654). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the rewinding lottery table in the EG in the rewinding lottery table shown in FIG. 51, and rewinds to the EG or PEG with a probability associated with the subflag lottery number. A rewinding lottery is performed to determine whether or not the drawing is performed (S655).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the rewind lottery has been won (S656). Here, when it is determined that the rewind lottery has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the SEG additional game number lottery table shown in FIG. 56, and has a probability associated with the sub flag conversion number. A lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be added to SEG by lottery (S657).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the immediate notification of the number of additional games has been won based on the result of the lottery for the number of additional games of SEG (S658). Here, if it is determined that the immediate notification of the number of additional games has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stock of the number of additional games of SEG has been won based on the result of the lottery of the number of additional games of SEG. (S659).

Here, if it is determined that the stock of the number of SEG additional games has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the number of the winning stock games to the number of SEG stock games (S660).

In step S659, when it is determined that the stock of the number of SEG additional games has not been won (NO), or after executing the process of step S660, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of EG games is 0. (S661).

Here, if it is determined that the number of EG games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the EG processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of EG games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of SEG stock games is 1 or more (S662).

Here, when it is determined that the number of SEG stock games is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of EG games (S663) and sets the next game state to GG (S664).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the EG rescue flag is valid (S665). Here, when it is determined that the EG rescue flag is valid (YES), the sub CPU 102 draws the GG continuation rate with the probability shown in the EG rescue rate distribution lottery table at the time of EG rescue shown in FIG. 55. The GG continuation rate distribution lottery at the time of relief during EG is performed (S666), and the GG continuation rate determined by the GG continuation rate distribution lottery at the time of relief during EG is stocked in the sub RAM 103 (S667).

If it is determined in step S665 that the EG rescue flag is not valid (NO), or after executing the process of step S667, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG games is 1 or more (S668). ..

Here, if it is determined that the number of GG games is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the EG processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of GG games is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the GG counter (S669), and ends the EG processing.

If it is determined in step S658 that the immediate notification of the number of SEG additional games has been won (YES), or if it is determined in step S662 that the number of SEG stock games is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 , The number of SEG initial games obtained by adding the number of games won for immediate notification and the number of SEG stock games is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S670).

Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of SEG stock games (S671), initializes the number of SEG games (S672), sets the next game state to SEG (S673), and ends the processing during EG.

If it is determined in step S656 that the rewind lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of SEG stock games (S674). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is any of 23 to 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is "red 7N", "red 7SP", or "GOD") (S675).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 23 to 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the GG counter (S676). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a rewinding winning distribution lottery to distribute the GG continuation rate added by winning the rewinding lottery (S677).

In the rewind-winning distribution lottery, the sub CPU 102 refers to the rewinding-winning distribution table shown in FIG. 52, identifies the sub-game state and the distribution number associated with the number of remaining games in the sub-game state. With reference to the rewinding winning distribution lottery table shown in FIG. 53, the GG continuation rate is determined by lottery with the probability associated with the distribution number.

Next, the sub CPU 102 stocks the GG continuation rate determined by the rewinding distribution lottery in the sub RAM 103 (S678). If it is determined in step S675 that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 23 to 25 (YES), or after executing the process of step S678, the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of EG games (S679).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the PEG has been won by the rewind lottery in step S655 (S680). Here, if it is determined that the PEG has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the EG processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the PEG has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of PEG games (S681), sets the next game state to PEG (S682), and ends the EG processing.

<Treatment during SEG>
96 and 97 are flowcharts showing the SEG processing executed in step S457 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 82.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of SEG games is the initial value (S700). Here, when it is determined that the number of SEG games is the initial value (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of SEG initial games stored in the sub RAM 103 to the number of SEG games (S701).

When it is determined in step S700 that the number of SEG games is not the initial value (NO), or after executing the process of step S701, the sub CPU 102 clears the EG rescue flag (S702).

Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of SEG games (S703), and executes the common process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 (S704). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the rewind lottery table in SEG in the rewind lottery table shown in FIG. 51, and rewinds to EG or PEG with a probability associated with the subflag lottery number. A rewind lottery is performed to determine whether or not the lottery is performed (S705).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the rewind lottery has been won (S706). Here, if it is determined that the rewind lottery has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of SEG games is 0 (S707).

Here, if it is determined that the number of SEG games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during SEG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of SEG games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of SEG games (S708).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of EG games is 0 (S709). Here, if it is determined that the number of EG games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to EG (S710), and ends the processing during SEG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of EG games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of EG games (S711) and sets the next game state to GG (S712). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG games is 1 or more (S713).

Here, if it is determined that the number of GG games is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the GG counter (S714), and ends the SEG processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of GG games is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during SEG.

If it is determined in step S706 that the rewind lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of SEG stock games (S715). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is any of 23 to 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is "red 7N", "red 7SP", or "GOD") (S716).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 23 to 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the GG counter (S717). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a rewinding winning distribution lottery to distribute the GG continuation rate added by winning the rewinding lottery (S718).

Next, the sub CPU 102 stocks the GG continuation rate determined by the rewinding winning distribution lottery in the sub RAM 103 (S719).

If it is determined in step S716 that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 23 to 25 (YES), or after executing the process of step S719, the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of EG games (S720) and SEG. Initialize the number of games (S721).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the PEG has been won by the rewinding lottery in step S706 (S722). Here, if it is determined that the PEG has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to the EG (S723), and ends the SEG processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the PEG has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of PEG games (S724), sets the next game state to PEG (S725), and ends the processing during SEG.

<Treatment during PEG>
98 and 99 are flowcharts showing the PEG processing executed in the start command reception processing step S459 shown in FIG. 82 and the EG processing step S649 shown in FIGS. 93 to 95.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of PEG games is the initial value (S740). Here, when it is determined that the number of PEG games is the initial value (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG games is the initial value (S741).

When it is determined that the number of GG games is the initial value (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets 100 to the number of GG games (S742) and subtracts 1 from the value of the GG counter (S743).

When it is determined in step S741 that the number of GG games is not the initial value (NO), or after executing the process of step S743, the sub CPU 102 sets 16 to the number of PEG games (S744).

If it is determined in step S740 that the number of PEG games is not the initial value (NO), or after executing the process of step S744, the sub CPU 102 clears the EG relief flag (S745).

Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of PEG games (S746), and executes the common process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 (S747). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the rewind lottery table in PEG in the rewind lottery table shown in FIG. 51, and rewinds to EG or PEG with a probability associated with the subflag lottery number. A rewind lottery is performed to determine whether or not the lottery is performed (S748).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the rewind lottery has been won (S749). Here, if it is determined that the rewind lottery has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of PEG games is 0 (S750).

Here, if it is determined that the number of PEG games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during PEG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of PEG games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of PEG games (S751).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to GG (S752), and determines whether or not the number of GG games is 1 or more (S753). Here, if it is determined that the number of GG games is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the GG counter (S754), and ends the PEG processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of GG games is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during PEG.

If it is determined in step S749 that the rewind lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of SEG stock games (S755). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is any of 23 to 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is "red 7N", "red 7SP", or "GOD") (S756).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 23 to 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the GG counter (S757). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a rewinding winning distribution lottery to distribute the GG continuation rate added by winning the rewinding lottery (S758).

Next, the sub CPU 102 stocks the GG continuation rate determined by the rewinding winning distribution lottery in the sub RAM 103 (S759).

If it is determined in step S756 that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 23 to 25 (YES), or after executing the process of step S759, the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of PEG games (S760).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the EG has been won by the rewind lottery in step S756 (S761). Here, if it is determined that the EG has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during PEG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the EG has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of EG games (S762), sets the next game state to the EG (S763), and ends the PEG processing.

<Processing during GG>
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the GG processing executed in step S461 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG games is the initial value (S780). Here, when it is determined that the number of GG games is the initial value (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of GG games to 100 (S781).

When it is determined in step S780 that the number of GG games is not the initial value (NO), or after executing the process of step S781, the sub CPU 102 executes the common process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 (S782). Subtract 1 from the number of GG games (S783).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG games is 0 (S784). Here, if it is determined that the number of GG games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during GG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of GG games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of CZ precursor games in GG is 0 or more (S785).

Here, if it is determined that the number of CZ precursor games in GG is 0 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during GG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of CZ precursor games in GG is not 0 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of any of 22 to 24 (that is, the sub flag conversion role name is "right red 7", It is determined whether or not it is "Red 7N" or "Red 7SP" (S786).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the number of GG games (S787), and ends the GG processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 22 to 24 (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of GG games (S788) and subtracts 1 from the value of the GG counter (S789).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the GG counter is 0 or more (S790). Here, when it is determined that the value of the GG counter is not 0 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of GG precursor games to determine the number of GG precursor games by lottery (S791), and the GG precursor games are drawn. The result of the number of games lottery is set to the number of GG precursor games (S792).

If it is determined in step S790 that the value of the GG counter is 0 or more (YES), or after executing the process of step S792, the sub CPU 102 normally sets the next game state (S793). End the processing during GG.

<Common processing>
101 and 102 are the start command reception processing step S462 shown in FIG. 82, the CZ intermediate processing step S510 shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, and the EG intermediate processing step S654 shown in FIGS. 93 to 95. , SEG in-treatment step S704 shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, PEG in-process step S747 shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, and common processing executed in GG in-process step S782 shown in FIG. 100. It is a flowchart which shows.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the history information generation process shown in FIGS. 103 to 106 (S800). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the history lottery table shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, and draws GG, CZ1 to CZ4, and GG + CZ1 with a probability according to the sub-game state and the result of the history information generation process. (S801).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the GG has been won by the history lottery (S802). Here, when it is determined that the GG has been won by the history lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the GG counter (S803).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a GG winning distribution lottery to distribute the GG continuation rate added by winning the history lottery (S804). Next, the sub CPU 102 stocks the GG continuation rate determined by the GG winning distribution lottery in the sub RAM 103 (S805).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the GG is in the precursor (S807). Here, if it is determined that the GG is not in the precursor (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is normal (S808).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-game state is normal (YES), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of GG precursor games to determine the number of GG precursor games by lottery (S809). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the GG precursor game number lottery to the GG precursor game number (S810), and initializes the CZ precursor game counter during normal operation (S811).

In step S802, when it is determined that the GG was not won by the history lottery (NO), in step S807, when it is determined that the GG is in the precursor (YES), in step S808, it is determined that the sub-game state is not normal. If (NO), or after executing the process of step S811, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ1 has been won by the history lottery (S812).

Here, when it is determined that the CZ1 has been won by the history lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ1 in the CZ information stock (S813). On the other hand, when it is determined that the CZ1 has not been won by the history lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ2 has been won by the history lottery (S814). Here, if it is determined that the CZ2 has been won by the history lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ2 in the CZ information stock (S815).

After completing the process of step S813 or S815, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the GG is in the precursor (S816). Here, if it is determined that the GG is in the precursor (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the common process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the GG is not in the precursor (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is in the precursor (S817). Here, if it is determined that the CZ sign is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the common process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the GG is not in the precursor (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is in the precursor (S817). Here, if it is determined that the CZ sign is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the common process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the CZ is not in the precursor (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is normal (S818). Here, if it is determined that the sub-game state is not normal (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the common process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is normal (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal middle CZ precursor counter lottery (S819), and the result of the normal middle CZ precursor counter lottery is the normal middle CZ precursor counter. (S820) to end the common process.

If it is determined in step S814 that the CZ2 has not been won in the history lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ3 has been won in the history lottery (S821).

If it is determined by the history lottery that the CZ3 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ3 in the CZ information stock (S822). On the other hand, when it is determined that the CZ3 has not been won by the history lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ4 has been won by the history lottery (S823).

Here, when it is determined that the CZ4 has been won by the history lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ4 in the CZ information stock (S824). On the other hand, if it is determined in the history lottery that the CZ4 has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the common process.

After executing the process of step S822 or S824, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is “GOD”) (S825). Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is 25, the sub CPU 102 ends the common process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the CZ precursor (S826). Here, if it is determined that the CZ sign is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the common process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the CZ is not in the precursor (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is GG (S827). Here, if it is determined that the sub-game state is not GG (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the common process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is GG (YES), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of CZ precursor games in GG (S828), and the result of the lottery of the number of CZ precursor games in GG is the CZ number in GG. Set to the number of precursor games (S829), and end the common process.

<History information generation process>
103 to 106 are flowcharts showing the history information generation process executed in step S800 of the common process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102.

First, the sub CPU 102 sets a loss in the history information (S840). In the present embodiment, the results of 5 units of games are stored as a history in the history information. That is, when the history is set in the history information, the history before the 5-unit game is deleted, and the set history is newly stored in the history information.

Next, the sub CPU 102 has a sub-flag conversion number of 10 to 12 or 14 (that is, the sub-flag conversion combination name is "normal lip", "left normal lip", "medium normal lip" or "C lip"). Whether or not it is determined (S841).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 10 to 12 or 14 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the history Seirenso counter to 0 (S842). On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 10 to 12 or 14 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "history blue" in the history information (S843).

After executing the process of S843, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the history Seirenso counter is 5 or more (S844). Here, when it is determined that the value of the history Seirenso counter is not 5 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the history Seirenso counter (S845).

When it is determined in step S844 that the value of the history Seirenso counter is 5 or more (YES), or after executing the process of step S842 or S845, the sub CPU 102 has any of 6 to 9 sub flag conversion numbers. (That is, the sub-flag conversion combination name is "213L bell", "231L bell", "312L bell" or "321L bell") is determined (S846).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 6 to 9 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the history Hakurenso counter to 0 (S847). On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 6 to 9 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "history white" in the history information (S848).

After executing the process of S848, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the history Hakurenso counter is 5 or more (S849). Here, when it is determined that the value of the history white ream villa counter is not 5 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the history white ream villa counter (S850).

In step S849, when it is determined that the value of the history Hakurenso counter is 5 or more (YES), or after executing the process of step S847 or S850, the sub CPU 102 has sub flag conversion numbers 2 to 5, 13 Or any of 15 to 17 (that is, the sub-flag conversion role names are "213 bell", "231 bell", "312 bell", "321 bell", "B yellow lip", "left CU bell", "CU bell". Or, it is determined whether or not it is "C bell") (S851).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 2 to 5, 13 or 15 to 17 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the history Coptis counter to 0 (S852). On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 2 to 5, 13 or 15 to 17 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "history yellow" in the history information (S853).

After executing the process of S853, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the history Coptis counter is 5 or more (S854). Here, when it is determined that the value of the history Coptis counter is not 5 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the history Coptis counter (S855).

When it is determined in step S854 that the value of the Coptis chinensis counter is 5 or more (YES), or after executing the process of step S852 or S855, the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of 18 to 21. (That is, it is determined whether or not the sub-flag conversion combination name is "special combination SP", "right red 7F", "red 7F1", or "red 7F2") (S856). Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 18 to 21 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the "special role" in the history information (S857).

If it is determined in step S856 that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 18 to 21 (NO), or after executing the process of step S857, the sub CPU 102 has a sub-flag conversion number of 22 to 24 (that is, any of 22 to 24). , It is determined whether or not the sub-flag conversion combination name is "right red 7", "red 7N" or "red 7SP") (S858).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 22 to 24 (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the red 7 consecutive villa counter (S859). On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "red 7" in the history information (S860).

After executing the process of S860, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the red 7 consecutive villa counter is 5 or more (S861). Here, when it is determined that the value of the red 7 consecutive villa counter is not 5 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the red 7 consecutive villa counter (S862).

If it is determined in step S861 that the value of the red 7 consecutive villa counter is 5 or more (YES), or after executing the process of step S859 or S862, the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of 25 (that is, a sub flag). It is determined whether or not the conversion combination name is “GOD”) (S863).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is 25 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “GOD” in the history information (S864). After executing the process of step S864, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "GOD" is set twice or more in the history information (S865).

Here, if it is determined that "GOD" is set twice or more in the history (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 15 ("GOD" is set twice or more within 5G). (S866), the history information generation process is terminated.

In step S863, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not 25 (NO), or in step S865, when it is determined that "GOD" is not set twice or more in the history (NO), the sub CPU 102 Determines whether or not the value of the red 7 consecutive villa counter is 2 or more (S867).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the red 7 consecutive villa counter is 2 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 14 (“red 7” is 2 or more consecutive) (S868). The history information generation process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the red 7 consecutive villa counter is not 2 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of any of 22 to 24 (that is, the sub flag conversion role name is "right red 7". It is determined whether or not it is "Red 7N" or "Red 7SP" (S869).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "red 7" is set three times or more in the history (yes). S870).

Here, if it is determined that "Red 7" is set three or more times in the history (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 13 ("Red 7" is set three times or more within 5G). It is set (S871), and the history information generation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "Red 7" is not set three or more times in the history (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "Red 7" is set twice or more in the history. (S872).

Here, if it is determined that "Red 7" is set twice or more in the history (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 12 ("Red 7" is set twice within 5G). (S873), the history information generation process is terminated.

In step S869, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 22 to 24 (NO), or in step S872, when it is determined that "red 7" is not set twice or more in the history. (NO), the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of any one of 18 to 21 (that is, the sub flag conversion role name is "special role SP", "right red 7F", "red 7F1" or "red 7F2", hereinafter simply It is determined whether or not it is a "special role" (S874).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 18 to 21 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "special role" is set 5 times or more in the history (YES). S875).

Here, if it is determined that the "special role" is set 5 times or more in the history (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 11 (the "special role" is set 5 times within 5G). Then (S876), the history information generation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the "special role" is not set 5 times or more in the history (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "special role" is set 4 times or more in the history. (S877).

Here, if it is determined that the "special role" is set four times or more in the history (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 10 (the "special role" is set four times within 5G). (S878), the history information generation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the "special role" is not set four times or more in the history (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "special role" is set three times or more in the history. (S879).

Here, if it is determined that the "special role" is set three times or more in the history (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 9 (the "special role" is set three times within 5G). Then (S880), the history information generation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the "special role" is not set three times or more in the history (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "special role" is set twice or more in the history. (S881).

Here, if it is determined that the "special role" is set twice or more in the history (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 8 (the "special role" is set twice or more within 5G). Set (S882) and end the history information generation process.

When it is determined in step S874 that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 18 to 21 (NO), or when it is determined in step S881 that the "special combination" is not set twice or more in the history. (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the history white ream villa counter is 5 or more (S883).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the history white ream counter is 5 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 7 (history white 5 reams) (S884), and performs history information generation processing. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the Coptis chinensis counter is not 5 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the Coptis chinensis counter is 5 or more (S885).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the Coptis chinensis counter is 5 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 6 (Coptis chinensis 5) (S886), and the history information generation process. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the history Coptis counter is not 5 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the Coptis counter is 4 or more (S887).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the Coptis chinensis counter is 4 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 5 (Coptis chinensis 4) (S888) and processes the history information generation. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the history Coptis counter is not 4 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the Coptis counter is 3 or more (S889).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the Coptis chinensis counter is 3 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 4 (Coptis chinensis 3) (S890) and processes the history information generation. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the Coptis chinensis counter is not 3 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the Coptis chinensis counter is 5 or more (S891).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the history blue ream counter is 5 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 3 (history blue 5 reams) (S892), and the history information generation process. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the history Seirenso counter is not 5 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the history Seirenso counter is 4 or more (S893).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the history blue ream counter is 4 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 2 (history blue 4 reams) (S894), and the history information generation process. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the history Seirenso counter is not 4 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the history Seirenso counter is 3 or more (S895).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the history blue ream counter is 3 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 1 (history blue 3 reams) (S896), and the history information generation process. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the history Seirenso counter is not 3 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the history result to 0 (none) (S897) and ends the history information generation process.

<Common lottery processing>
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a common lottery process executed in step S463 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 82.

First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the added GG number lottery table according to the sub-game state among the added GG number lottery tables (not shown) prepared for each sub-game state, and determines the added GG number by lottery (S900). .. Here, in the addition GG number lottery table, the winning probability of each addition GG number is associated with the sub-flag lottery number.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of added GGs is 0 (S901). Here, when it is determined that the number of added GGs is 0, the sub CPU 102 ends the common lottery process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of added GGs is not 0, the sub CPU 102 sets or adds the number of added GGs to the value of the GG counter (S902). That is, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of added GGs in the value of the GG counter when the value of the GG counter is the initial value, and adds GG to the value of the GG counter when the value of the GG counter is not the initial value. Add numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is GG, EG, SEG, or PEG (S903). Here, if it is determined that the sub-game state is any of GG, EG, SEG, or PEG (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the common lottery process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is neither GG, EG, SEG or PEG (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a GG winning distribution lottery to distribute the GG continuation rate (S904). Next, the sub CPU 102 stocks the GG continuation rate determined by the GG winning distribution lottery in the sub RAM 103 (S905).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is any of 23 to 25 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is "red 7N", "red 7SP", or "GOD") (S906).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 23 to 25 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the CZ precursor counter during normal operation (S907), and sets the number of GG precursor games to 0. Set (S908), set the next game state to GG (S909), and end the common lottery process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 23 to 25 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG precursor games is 0 (S910). Here, if it is determined that the number of GG precursor games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the common lottery process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of GG precursor games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of GG precursor games to determine the number of GG precursor games by lottery (S911), and GG precursor games. The result of the number lottery is set to the number of GG precursor games (S912), and the common lottery process is completed.

<Post-lottery processing>
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the lottery post-processing executed in step S464 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 82.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a GG continuation rate stocked in the sub RAM 103 (S920). Here, if it is determined that there is a GG continuation rate stocked in the sub RAM 103 (YES), the sub CPU 102 draws at one of the GG continuation rates stocked in the sub RAM 103. Lottery is performed (S921).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuation rate lottery has been won (S922). Here, if it is determined that the continuation rate lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the GG counter (S923). On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuation rate lottery has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 deletes the GG continuation rate used for the lottery from the sub RAM 103 (S924).

If it is determined in step S920 that there is no GG continuation rate stocked in the sub RAM 103 (NO), or after executing the process of step S924, the sub CPU 102 has a sub flag conversion number of any of 22 to 24 (that is,). , It is determined whether or not the sub-flag conversion combination name is "right red 7", "red 7N" or "red 7SP") (S925).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is not any of 22 to 24 (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the CZ activation process shown in FIG. 109 (S926), and the GG activation process shown in FIG. 110. Is executed (S927), and the lottery post-processing is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of CZ precursor games (S928) and initializes the normal medium CZ precursor counter (normally). S929), the number of CZ precursor games in GG is initialized (S930).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is EG, SEG, or PEG (S931). Here, if it is determined that the sub-game state is any of EG, SEG, or PEG (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery post-processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-game state is neither EG, SEG or PEG (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of EG games (S932) and sets the next game state to EG (S933). , End the lottery post-processing.

<CZ activation process>
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a CZ activation process executed in step S926 of the lottery post-processing shown in FIG. 108.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the CZ precursor counter during normal operation is 0 (S940). Here, when it is determined that the value of the CZ precursor counter is 0 during normal operation (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of CZ lottery games (S941).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ1 is present in the CZ information stock (S942). Here, if it is determined that CZ1 is present in the CZ information stock (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to CZ1 (S943), and ends the CZ activation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no CZ1 in the CZ information stock (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to CZ2 (S944) and ends the CZ activation process.

In step S940, when it is determined that the value of the CZ precursor counter during normal operation is not 0 (NO), or after executing the process of step S943 or S944, the sub CPU 102 causes the value of the CZ precursor counter in GG to be 0. It is determined whether or not it is (S945).

Here, if it is determined that the value of the CZ precursor counter in GG is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ activation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the CZ precursor counter in GG is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of CZ lottery games (S946).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is CZ3 in the CZ information stock (S947). Here, if it is determined that there is CZ3 in the CZ information stock (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to CZ3 (S948), and ends the CZ activation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no CZ3 in the CZ information stock (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the next game state to CZ4 (S949) and ends the CZ activation process.

<GG activation process>
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a GG activation process executed in step S927 of the lottery post-processing shown in FIG. 108.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of GG precursor games is 0 (S950). Here, if it is determined that the number of GG precursor games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the GG activation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of GG precursor games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of GG games (S951), sets the next game state to GG (S952), and activates the GG. To finish.

<Output timing of external signal 2>
Next, the output timing of the external signal 2 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 (a) and 114 (b). FIG. 114 (a) is a timing chart of various signals including the external signal 2 when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line when not in GG due to GOD alignment. On the other hand, FIG. 114 (b) is a timing chart of various signals including the external signal 2 when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line again during the GG with GOD alignment.

First, in the present embodiment, when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line, "100" is set or added to the GOD counter (not shown) as the number of GG games. The GOD counter is a counter that operates when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line.

Further, the value of the GOD counter is subtracted by "1" each time a unit game is played, and is subtracted until it finally becomes "0". An upper limit value is provided for the value of the GOD counter, and this upper limit value is, for example, "998".

Therefore, when the value of the GOD counter is "0", it indicates that the sub-game state is not in GG due to GOD alignment. On the other hand, when the value of the GOD counter is "1" or more, it indicates that the sub-game state is in GG due to GOD alignment. The value of the GOD counter is cleared when the setting is changed in the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the GG due to the GOD alignment is not performed, that is, when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line when the value of the GOD counter is "0", the payout signal is turned ON. The external signal 2 is turned on, that is, output at the first timing (t1), which is the time between t1 and t2 earlier than the timing (t2).

Here, the external signal 2 corresponds to a special combination display signal. Further, the payout signal is included in various signals transmitted to the external device 200 after the end of the unit game, and specifically, represents the start of payout of medals when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line. It is a signal. The payout signal corresponds to a reference signal.

As described above, when the sub-game state when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line is not in the GG due to the GOD alignment, the main CPU 93 is at the first timing (t1) with respect to the payout signal. The external signal 2 is transmitted to the external device 200.

The external signal 2 turned on at the first timing (t1) is turned off after the predetermined game lock is completed after the medals have been paid out when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the valid line. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), when the GG is in the GOD alignment, that is, when the value of the GOD counter is "1" and the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the valid line, the payout is made. The external signal 2 is turned on, that is, output at the second timing (t3), which is the time between the time t3 and the time t2, which is earlier than the signal ON timing (t2).

Here, the second timing (t3) is a timing different from the first timing (t1), and specifically, is earlier than the first timing (t1) with respect to the ON timing (t2) of the payout signal. It's timing.

As described above, when the sub-game state when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the effective line is in GG due to GOD alignment, the main CPU 93 has the first timing (t1) with respect to the payout signal. The external signal 2 is transmitted to the external device 200 at the second timing (t3) different from the above.

In this case, the external signal 2 turned on at the second timing (t3) is turned off before the start of payout of medals or at the timing of time t4 at the start of payout when the combination related to GOD1 and GOD2 is displayed on the valid line. Will be done. The time from the time t3 to the time t4 is an arbitrarily set time, for example, 550 msec. The external signal 2 is also turned off when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is changed.

<Lamp lighting mode>
Next, the lighting mode of the lamps 19L and 19R will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a schematic view of the lamp 19L. In the following, the lighting mode of the lamp 19L will be described as an example, but the lamp 19R is similarly configured.

As shown in FIG. 115, the lighting of the lamp 19L is controlled independently for each of the three regions 19a, 19b, and 19c. That is, the LED group 25 (see FIG. 3) constituting the lamp 19L is independently lit and controlled for each of the three regions 19a, 19b, and 19c.

Here, the three regions 19a, 19b, and 19c are provided corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower regions of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided in the frame of the display window 4 (see FIG. 2). It is a thing. In particular, in the present embodiment, the three regions 19a, 19b, and 19c correspond to the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L displayed in the frame of the display window 4L.

Specifically, of the three areas 19a, 19b, 19c, the area 19a corresponds to the upper part of the left reel 3L displayed in the frame of the display window 4L, and the area 19b corresponds to the middle part, and the area 19c corresponds to the middle part. Corresponds to the lower row respectively.

In the present embodiment, the lamp 19L lights up one of the three regions 19a, 19b, and 19c when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an effect is generated when the GOD button 29 is pressed). Be controlled.

At this time, when any of the three areas 19a, 19b, and 19c is lit, the symbol of the left reel 3L corresponding to the lit area (the symbol stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages). It is possible to notify that the internal winning combination of the combination including is established.

For example, when the symbol stopped at the upper stage of the left reel 3L when the area 19a is lit is "GOD1", it is notified that the internal winning combination of the combination including "GOD1" is established. As a result, the player can predict in advance the established internal winning combination by visually recognizing the lighting area of the lamp 19L.

The timing at which the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied may be after the stop of the left reel 3L or before the stop of the left reel 3L. In particular, before the left reel 3L is stopped, as compared with the case where the left reel 3L is stopped at random, a player's desired pattern is pressed in the area corresponding to the lighting area of the lamp 19L. It is possible to improve the interest in the stop operation.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of pachi-slot machines 1 determined by lottery when the sub-game state is CZ even when the specific condition for shifting the sub-game state to GG is not satisfied. If the special transition condition in which the types of decorative symbols are the same is satisfied, the sub-game state is shifted to GG, so that it is possible to prevent the player's interest in displaying the decorative symbols from being lowered.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment raises the probability that the special transition condition is satisfied when the sub-game state is CZ, rather than the specific condition is satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game is increased. It can be improved and the operation can be improved.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, before the decorative symbols are determined by lottery, the decorative symbols to be drawn are determined as a number group, and the number of decorative symbols to be drawn is changed. Since the probability that the special transition condition is satisfied can be changed when the sub-game state is CZ, the degree of expectation of the player in CZ can be widened.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the sub-game state is CZ, if a "mirror" is displayed as a special decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 11, the probability that the special transition condition is satisfied increases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in displaying the decorative pattern.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays on the liquid crystal display device 11 even if the combination of decorative symbols of the same type is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub-game state is CZ. If the combination of the decorative symbols is a predetermined GG winning reach, the GG is added.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the unit game in CZ, there is no possibility that the combination of the same type of decorative symbol combination is displayed before the final decorative symbol is displayed. Even if there is, the player's expectation can be maintained until the final decorative pattern is displayed.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a combination of decorative symbols of the same type, that is, displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. When the combination of decorative symbols is in a so-called tempai state, the probability that the special transition condition will be satisfied in CZ is high by maintaining this combination of decorative symbols of the same type until the next unit game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in displaying the decorative pattern.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 even when the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a combination of decorative symbols of the same type as a part. Depending on the combination of decorative symbols, the combination of decorative symbols of the same type is not always maintained until the next unit game, so that the player's interest in displaying the decorative symbols can be further improved.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment not only adds GG according to the result of each unit game in EG, but also adds GG advantageously to the player according to the number of remaining games of EG. At the same time, since the number of remaining games of the EG is returned to the specified unit number of games, it is possible to give the player various expectations for the games in the EG.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment adds GG when the history of the result of the past unit game satisfies a predetermined condition regardless of whether the sub-game state is EG or not. As a result, it is possible to give the player a more diverse sense of expectation for the game in the EG.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the history of the results of past unit games, so that even if the player does not remember the results of past unit games, the degree of expectation for the addition of GG Can be recognized by the player.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the sub-game state is EG and a special condition such as winning a lottery according to the internal winning combination is satisfied, the pachislot machine 1 is drawn until the addition of GG is performed. By maintaining the number of remaining games of EG over the number of unit games determined by, the number of unit games of EG increases and the probability that GG is added is substantially increased. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a more diverse sense of expectation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the history of the result of the past unit game in PEG is higher than that in the case where the history of the result of the past unit game in the sub-game state other than PEG satisfies the predetermined condition. Since the addition of the GG is more advantageous to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can have more diverse expectations for the game in the EG.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a special role at the first and second timings, which are different from each other depending on whether or not the sub-game state when the GOD alignment is displayed is the GG due to the GOD alignment. Since the display signal is transmitted to the external device 200, it is possible to transmit to the external device 200 whether or not the sub-game state when the GOD alignment to be transferred to the GG is displayed is the GG due to the GOD alignment. As a result, on the external device 200 side, it is possible to determine whether or not the GOD alignment is displayed again in the GG due to the GOD alignment.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not the sub-game state when the GOD alignment is displayed is the GG due to the GOD alignment due to the reception timing of the reference signal, for example, the special combination display signal for the payout signal. Can be transmitted to the external device 200.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the following conditions in the CZ, provided that the combination of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is the heaven transition when the sub-game state is the CZ. After the unit game, it becomes relatively easy to shift to the GG, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in displaying the decorative pattern.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the sub-game state is CZ and the combination of decorative symbols of the same type is maintained until the next unit game, the stop operation is performed in the next unit game. By drawing out the decorative symbols that are not maintained each time, the probability that the special transition condition is satisfied in the CZ is further increased, so that the player's interest in the game in the CZ can be improved. it can.

[Modification example]
The processing in CZ shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 may be performed as a modification described below with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. The table described below is referred to by the sub CPU 102 when executing a modified example of the processing during CZ.

<CZ1 button stock lottery table>
The CZ1 button stock lottery table shown in FIG. 116 represents the probability that the number of winning counters to be added to the button counter is determined for each sub-flag lottery combination. In the present embodiment, the number of winning counters is determined in the range of 0 to 5 which are non-winning.

For example, when the sub-flag lottery role is "CU bell", "1" is determined with a probability of 24576/32768, "2" is determined with a probability of 6144/32768, and "2" is determined with a probability of 2048/32768. "5" is decided.

<CZ1GG lottery table>
The CZ1GG lottery table shown in FIG. 117 shows the winning probability of GG for each sub-flag lottery combination. For example, when the sub-flag lottery combination is "CU bell", the non-winning of GG is determined with the probability of 8192/32768, and the winning of GG is determined with the probability of 24576/32768.

<CZ1 button counter GG conversion lottery table>
The CZ1GG lottery table shown in FIG. 118 represents the probability of non-winning and winning of GG with respect to one value of the button counter. In the present embodiment, the winning of GG is determined with a probability of 32768/32768.

The CZ1GG lottery table shown in FIG. 117 is set so that the GG wins only the value of the button counter, but the non-win and the win are distributed with a predetermined probability to one value of the button counter. It may be set to.

<CZ processing (modification example)>
119 and 120 are flowcharts showing a modification of the processing during CZ shown in FIGS. 86 and 87.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the common processing shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 (S960). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of elapsed games of CZ1 is 0 (S961). Here, when it is determined that the number of elapsed games of CZ1 is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of button stock lottery games to 5 (S962) and sets the button counter to 1 (S963). ..

When it is determined in step S961 that the number of CZ1 elapsed games is not 0 (NO), or after the processing of step S963 is completed, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the number of CZ1 elapsed games (S964).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (that is, the sub flag conversion combination name is "right red 7", "red 7N", or "red 7SP") (S965). ).

Here, if it is determined that the sub-flag conversion number is neither 22 to 24 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of button stock lottery games is 0 (S966).

Here, when it is determined that the number of button stock lottery games is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of button stock lottery games (S967). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ1 button stock lottery table shown in FIG. 116, and performs a CZ1 button stock lottery in which the number of button stocks is determined by lottery with a probability corresponding to the sub flag lottery number (S968). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of winning counters to the value of the button counter based on the result of the CZ1 button stock lottery (S969), and ends the CZ processing.

When it is determined in step S966 that the number of button stock lottery games is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ1GG lottery table shown in FIG. 117 and has a probability of being associated with the sub flag lottery number. A CZ1GG lottery is performed to determine whether or not the winner has been won by lottery (S970).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of added GGs is 0 (S971). In the present embodiment, the number of added GGs is set to 1 when the CZ1GG lottery is won in step S970, and the number of added GGs is set to 0 when the lottery is not won.

If it is determined in step S971 that the number of added GGs is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds the number of added GGs to the value of the GG counter (S972). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a GG winning distribution lottery to distribute the GG continuation rate (S973).

Next, the sub CPU 102 stocks the GG continuation rate determined by the GG winning distribution lottery in the sub RAM 103 (S974). If it is determined in step S971 that the number of added GGs is 0 (YES), or after executing the process of step S974, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the button counter (S975).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the button counter is 0 (S976). Here, if it is determined that the value of the button counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during CZ.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the button counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the GG counter is 1 or more (S977). Here, when it is determined that the value of the GG counter is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of CZ information stocks is 1 or more (S978).

Here, when it is determined that the number of CZ information stocks is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal medium CZ precursor counter lottery (S979), and the result of the normal medium CZ precursor counter lottery is normally performed. Set to the CZ precursor counter (S980).

When it is determined in step S978 that the number of CZ information stocks is not 1 or more (NO), or after executing the process of step S980, the sub CPU 102 normally sets the next game state (S981) and is in CZ. End the process.

If it is determined in step S977 that the value of the GG counter is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of GG games (S982) and sets 0 to the number of GG precursor games (S983). , The next game state is set to GG (S984), and the processing during CZ is completed.

If it is determined in step S965 that the sub-flag conversion number is any of 22 to 24 (YES), the sub CPU 102 clears the number of button stock lottery games to 0 (S985).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the button counter is 0 (S986). Here, if it is determined that the value of the button counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during CZ.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the button counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the button counter (S987). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the CZ button counter GG conversion lottery for drawing the GG with the probability shown in the CZ button counter GG conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 118 (S988).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the GG has been won by the CZ button counter GG conversion lottery (S989). Here, when it is determined that the GG has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the GG counter (S990).

If it is determined in step S989 that the GG was not won (NO), or after executing the process of step S990, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of step S986.

The CZ intermediate processing shown in FIGS. 119 and 120 has been described as being executed in place of the CZ intermediate processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, but when the sub-game state is CZ1 or CZ3, CZ1 to CZ4, such as executing the CZ intermediate processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 and executing the CZ intermediate processing shown in FIGS. 119 and 120 when the sub-game state is CZ2 or CZ4. However, any CZ processing may be executed.

Further, when it is determined that the sub-game state shifts to the CZ, whether the sub CPU 102 executes the CZ processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 by the lottery and the sub-flag lottery number and the like, FIGS. 119 and 119. You may choose whether to execute the CZ processing shown in 120.

In the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 has described an example in which the number of sets is applied as the number representing the period of GG advantageous to the player and the number of additions to be added to the GG, but instead of the number of sets, , The number of games may be applied, the number of notifications (navigation number) for favorably winning a so-called increasing combination with different winning modes depending on the pressing order may be applied, or the number of medals paid out may be applied. Often, a net increase in the number of medals paid out minus the number of inserted medals may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachislot machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention is a pachinko machine that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium. It can also be applied to other gaming machines such as gaming machines.

[Second Embodiment]
The first embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment applies to the second embodiment will be omitted.

[Game state]
The main gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a transition transition of the main gaming state.

In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a main gaming state and a sub gaming state are provided. The main gaming state is a gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 4). The sub-game state is a game state controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 5). FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the main gaming state among these gaming states.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, four types of gaming states are provided as the main gaming states: RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, BB gaming state, and MB gaming state.

In the RT0 game state, one unit game is performed by inserting two or three medals. In the RT1 game state, one unit game is performed by inserting two or three medals. The number of medals to be inserted in the BB game state is set to three, and in the BB game state, two medals cannot be inserted to perform a unit game. The number of medals to be inserted in the MB game state is set to two, and in the MB game state, three medals cannot be inserted to perform a unit game. In addition, in any of the gaming states, it is not possible to insert one medal to perform a unit game.

From the above, the unit games according to the present embodiment can be classified into the following (I) to (VI).
(I) Unit game performed in the RT0 game state (number of medals inserted: 3)
(II) Unit game performed in the RT0 game state (number of medals inserted: 2)
(III) Unit game performed in the RT1 game state (number of medals inserted: 3)
(IV) Unit game performed in the RT1 game state (number of medals inserted: 2)
(V) Unit game performed in the BB game state (number of medals inserted: 3)
(VI) Unit game performed in the MB game state (number of medals inserted: 2)

[Relationship between internal winning combination, number of inputs and number of payouts]
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination and the number of payouts for each number of inputs. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pushing order and the number of payouts.

FIG. 123 is a sub-flag conversion table (see FIG. 32) relating to the case where the three-card game is performed in the second embodiment. In the following description, FIG. 123 will be referred to when referring to the relationship between the push order and the number of payouts in the three-card game. In this specification, a unit game played by inserting three medals is referred to as a three-card game, and a unit game performed by inserting two medals is referred to as a two-card game. In some cases.

In FIG. 122, "normal lip", "right red 7F lip", "right red 7 lip 1", "right red 7 lip 2", "B yellow lip", "C lip", "red 7F lip 1", "Red 7F Lip 2", "Red 7F Lip 3", "Red 7 Lip 1", "Red 7 Lip 2", and "Red 7 Lip 3" are replay roles, and if these roles win a prize. Will be paid out in substantially the same number of medals as the number of inserted medals.

"213C Bell 1", "213C Bell 2", "213C Bell 3", "213C Bell 4", "213C Bell 5", "213C Bell 6", "231CD Bell 1", "231CD Bell 2", "231CD" Bell 3 ”,“ 231CD Bell 4 ”,“ 231CD Bell 5 ”,“ 231CD Bell 6 ”,“ 312C Bell ”,“ 312T Bell 1 ”,“ 312T Bell 2 ”,“ 312T Bell 3 ”,“ 312T Bell 4 ” , "312CD Bell", "321C Bell", "321T Bell 1", "321T Bell 2", "321T Bell 3", "321T Bell 4", "321CD Bell", "213L Bell 1", "213L Bell 2" "," 231L Bell 1 "," 231L Bell 2 "," 312L Bell 1 "," 312L Bell 2 "," 321L Bell 1 "," 321L Bell 2 "," Left CU Bell "," CU Bell "," "C bell", "special role", "special medal", "special SP", "GOD", "RB role 1", "RB role 2", and "RB role 3" are small roles. If these winning combinations are won, the number of medals may be paid out according to the number of inserted medals.

Specifically, in the three-card game, "213C Bell 1", "213C Bell 2", "213C Bell 3", "213C Bell 4", "213C Bell 5", "213C Bell 6", "231CD Bell 1" , "231CD Bell 2", "231CD Bell 3", "231CD Bell 4", "231CD Bell 5", "231CD Bell 6", "312C Bell", "312T Bell 1", "312T Bell 2", " 312T Bell 3 "," 312T Bell 4 "," 312CD Bell "," 321C Bell "," 321T Bell 1 "," 321T Bell 2 "," 321T Bell 3 "," 321T Bell 4 ", or" 321CD Bell " (In FIG. 122, the "name on the sub side" is "15 bells"), the number of medals to be paid out will be increased according to the order of stop operations (pushing order) and the timing of stop operations. , 15 sheets, 1 sheet, or 0 sheets.

That is, referring to FIG. 123, when the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pressing order (for example, in the case of "213 bell", the stop operation for the middle stop button 17C is performed as the first stop operation, and the second stop is performed. When a stop operation is performed on the left stop button 17L as an operation and a stop operation is performed on the right stop button 17R as a third stop operation), 15 medals are paid out. When a stop operation is performed on the left stop button 17L as the first stop operation, one medal is paid out with a probability of 1/8 (if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and 7/8. There is a probability that medals will not be paid out (if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate). If the stop buttons 17C, 17L, and 17R are operated in any other order, one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, in the two-card game, "213C bell 1", "213C bell 2", "213C bell 3", "213C bell 4", "213C bell 5", "213C bell 6", "231CD bell 1", "231CD Bell 2", "231CD Bell 3", "231CD Bell 4", "231CD Bell 5", "231CD Bell 6", "312C Bell", "312T Bell 1", "312T Bell 2", "312T Bell" 3 ”,“ 312T Bell 4 ”,“ 312CD Bell ”,“ 321C Bell ”,“ 321T Bell 1 ”,“ 321T Bell 2 ”,“ 321T Bell 3 ”,“ 321T Bell 4 ”, or“ 321T Bell ”( In FIG. 122, when the "name on the sub side" is "15 bells") is internally won, the number of medals to be paid out is 2 regardless of the stop operation order (pushing order) and the stop operation timing. It becomes a sheet.

As an example, the case where the "213C bell 1" is internally won will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 124 to 131. 124 to 126 are diagrams showing a symbol combination table. 127 to 131 are diagrams showing a combination table for each flag. In the symbol combination table, the number of payouts according to the number of input sheets (number of BETs) is associated with the combination of symbols. In the combination table for each flag, the combination that is allowed to be displayed on the valid line is associated with the internal winning combination.

With reference to FIGS. 127 to 131, when the "213C bell 1" is internally won, the combinations permitted to be displayed on the valid line are "C bell", "bell 1", "bell 2", They are "bell 17", "bell 18", "bell 19", and "bell 20".

Referring to FIGS. 124 to 126, when "C bell" is displayed on the valid line in the three-card game, 15 medals are paid out and "bell 1" is displayed on the valid line. In the case, if one medal is paid out and "Bell 2" is displayed on the valid line, one medal is paid out and "Bell 17" is displayed on the valid line, one medal. If the medal is paid out and "Bell 18" is displayed on the valid line, one medal is paid out, and if "Bell 19" is displayed on the valid line, one medal is paid out. When it is issued and "Bell 20" is displayed on the valid line, one medal is paid out. In FIG. 122, it is shown that the number of payouts corresponding to the internal winning combination "213C bell 1" and the number of input "3" is "15 or 1 or 0", of which "15" is The number of payouts when "C bell" is displayed on the valid line, and "1" is "bell 1", "bell 2", "bell 17", "bell 18", "bell 19", Alternatively, it is the number of payouts when "Bell 20" is displayed on the valid line.

On the other hand, in the two-card game, if "C bell" is displayed on the valid line, two medals are paid out, and if "Bell 1" is displayed on the valid line, two medals are paid out. If "Bell 2" is paid out and "Bell 2" is displayed on the valid line, two medals are paid out, and if "Bell 17" is displayed on the valid line, two medals are paid out. If "Bell 18" is displayed on the valid line, two medals will be paid out, and if "Bell 19" is displayed on the valid line, two medals will be paid out, "Bell 20". Is displayed on the valid line, two medals will be paid out. In FIG. 122, it is shown that the number of payouts corresponding to the internal winning combination "213C bell 1" and the number of input "2" is "2", and this "2" means "C bell". , "Bell 1", "Bell 2", "Bell 17", "Bell 18", "Bell 19", or "Bell 20" is the number of payouts when displayed on the valid line.

Similarly, in the three-card game, "213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", "231L bell 2", "312L bell 1", "312L bell 2", "321L bell 1" Or, when the "321L bell 2" (the combination in which the "name on the sub side" is "three bells" in FIG. 122) is internally won, the order of the stop operations (pushing order) and the timing of the stop operations are changed. Regardless, the number of medals paid out will be three.

When the "left CU bell" is internally won in a three-card game, the number of medals to be paid out is 15 or 1 depending on the order of stop operations (pushing order). When the "CU bell" wins internally in a three-card game, the number of medals paid out is 15 regardless of the order of stop operations (push order) and the timing of stop operations. When the "C-bell" wins internally in a three-card game, the number of medals paid out is 15 regardless of the order of stop operations (push order) and the timing of stop operations.

When a "special combination" wins internally in a three-card game, the number of medals paid out is one regardless of the order of stop operations (push order) and the timing of stop operations. In the three-card game, when the "special medal" is internally won, the number of medals to be paid out is 1 or 0 depending on the timing of the stop operation. When the "special SP" wins internally in the three-card game, the number of medals to be paid out is 1 or 0 depending on the timing of the stop operation. When the "GOD" wins internally in the three-card game, the number of medals to be paid out is 15 or 1 depending on the timing of the stop operation.

When the "RB combination 1" is internally won in the three-card game, the number of medals to be paid out is 15 regardless of the order of the stop operations (pushing order) and the timing of the stop operations. When the "RB combination 2" is internally won in the three-card game, the number of medals to be paid out is three regardless of the order of the stop operations (pushing order) and the timing of the stop operations. When the "RB combination 3" wins internally in a three-card game, the number of medals paid out is one regardless of the order of stop operations (push order) and the timing of stop operations.

As described above, when a small winning combination wins internally in a three-card game, the number of medals paid out differs depending on the type of small winning combination internally, but in a two-card game, the small winning combination wins internally. If this is the case, the number of medals to be paid out is 2 (constant) regardless of the type of small winning combination. Therefore, a small role that can be won internally in a two-card game is also called a two-card small role.

[Internal lottery table]
The internal lottery table according to the present embodiment includes an internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (three-card game), an internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (two-card game), and an RT1 game state (three-card game). An internal lottery table for the RT1 game state (two-card game), an internal lottery table for the BB game state, and an internal lottery table for the MB game state are provided.

FIG. 132 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (three-card game). FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (two-card game). FIG. 133 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state (three-card game). FIG. 133 (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT1 game state (two-card game). FIG. 134 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the BB game state. FIG. 134 (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the MB game state.

The internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (three-card game) shown in FIG. 132A is a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT0 gaming state (see (I) in FIG. 121). It is an internal lottery table referred to in. The internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (two-card game) shown in FIG. 132 (b) is a unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT0 gaming state (see (II) in FIG. 121). It is an internal lottery table referred to in.

The internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state (three-card game) shown in FIG. 133 (a) is a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT1 gaming state (see (III) in FIG. 121). It is an internal lottery table referred to in. The internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state (two-card game) shown in FIG. 133 (b) is a unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT1 gaming state (see (IV) in FIG. 121). It is an internal lottery table referred to in.

The internal lottery table for the BB game state shown in FIG. 134 (a) is an internal lottery table referred to in the unit game (see (V) of FIG. 121) performed during the BB game state. The internal lottery table for the MB game state shown in FIG. 134 (b) is an internal lottery table referred to in the unit game (see (VI) of FIG. 121) performed during the MB game state.

In the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, the lottery value for each set value (1 to 6) is associated with the winning number (No.). In addition, the abbreviation of the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number is shown.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not so-called "digits" occur. An internal lottery is performed by making the determination of.

The digit is performed when the numerical value to be subtracted is smaller, in other words, when the result of the subtraction is negative. For example, when the set value is 1, and the random number value extracted in the three-card game performed during the RT0 game state is "5000", first, the lottery corresponding to the winning number "1" from "5000" is drawn. The value "3640" is subtracted. The subtraction result is "5000-3640 = 1360", which is positive. Next, the lottery value "3150" corresponding to the winning number "2" is subtracted from the subtracted value "1360". The subtraction result is "1360-3150 = -1790", which is negative. Therefore, the winning number "2" ("B yellow lip") is determined as the internal winning combination.

According to such an internal lottery method, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the internal winning combination to which this is assigned is determined. When the number of times of the determination processing as to whether or not the subtraction result is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery processing becomes "missing". In addition, the winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

Further, in FIGS. 132 to 134, the "difference number", the "winning probability of each winning combination", and the "expected value" are shown for each internal winning combination. The "difference number", "winning probability of each combination", and "expected value" are numerical values obtained by the following calculations.

"Difference number" = "Payout number"-"Injection number"
"Winning probability of each role" = "lottery value" ÷ 65536
"Expected value" = "difference number" x "probability of winning each role"

The "number of medals inserted" is the number of medals inserted for one unit game. That is, the "insertion number" in the three-card game is three, and the "insertion number" in the two-card game is two.

The "number of medals to be paid out" is the number of medals to be paid out when each winning combination wins internally. The number of medals paid out when the replay role wins internally is considered to be the same as the number of medals inserted. That is, the "number of payouts" when the replay combination wins internally in the three-card game is three, and the "payout number" when the replay combination wins internally in the two-card game is two.

As a result, for example, in FIG. 132 (a), the “difference number” corresponding to the “normal lip” = 3-3 = 0. Further, in FIG. 132 (b), the “difference number” corresponding to the “normal lip” = 2-2 = 0.

If the number of medals that can be paid out in the case of internal winning differs depending on the order (pushing order) of the stop operations of the stop buttons 17C, 17L, 17R, push forward ("left" → "middle" → "right"). The number of medals to be paid out when the stop operation in the order of) is performed is defined as the "number of medals to be paid out". In the present embodiment, when the pressing order is not notified (when it is not AT) and an irregular pressing (stop operation in an order different from "left"-> "middle"-> "right") is performed, the irregular pressing is performed. The player usually pushes forward because a sound is emitted from the speaker (suggesting that a penalty is imposed) suggesting that this is prohibited. If the number of medals that can be paid out in the case of internal winning differs depending on the timing of the stop operation, the number of medals that can be paid out when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing is defined as the "number of medals to be paid out".

For example, when the "213C Bell 1" is internally won, the "payout number" is 1 in the 3-card game and 2 in the 2-card game (see FIGS. 122 and 123). Therefore, in FIG. 132 (a), the “difference number” corresponding to the “213C bell 1” = 1-3 = -2. Further, in FIG. 132 (b), the “difference number” = 2-2 = 0 corresponding to the “two small wins”. As described above, the "two-card small role" is a general term for small roles that can be internally won in a two-card game.

The "winning probability of each winning combination" is the probability that each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, in FIG. 132 (a), "winning probability of each winning combination" corresponding to "normal lip" = 3640 ÷ 65536 ≈ 0.055542, and "winning probability of each winning combination" corresponding to "213C bell 1" = 623. ÷ 65536 ≈ 0.009506. Further, in FIG. 132 (b), the "winning probability of each winning combination" corresponding to the "normal lip" = 8978 ÷ 65536 ≈ 0.136993, and the "winning probability of each winning combination" corresponding to the "two small winning combination" = It becomes 44558 ÷ 65536 ≈ 0.679901 (FIG. 132 (b) shows the calculation result for setting 1).

The "expected value" is the expected value of the number of medals increased or decreased due to the internal winning of each winning combination. For example, in FIG. 132 (a), the “expected value” corresponding to the “normal lip” ≈ 0 × 0.055542 = 0, and the “expected value” corresponding to the “213C bell 1” ≈ -2 × 0.009506 ≈ It becomes −0.019014251. Further, in FIG. 132 (b), the “expected value” corresponding to the “normal lip” ≈ 0 × 0.136993 = 0, and the “expected value” corresponding to the “two small wins” ≈ 0 × 0.679901 = It becomes 0.

In FIGS. 132 to 134, the total of "expected values" corresponding to each combination is shown. In FIG. 132 (a), the total “expected value” is −0.4218292224. In FIG. 132 (b), the total “expected value” is −0.3662. In FIG. 133 (a), the total “expected value” is −0.240142822. In FIG. 133 (b), the total “expected value” is −0.3052. In FIG. 134 (a), the total “expected value” is −0.6204833398. In FIG. 134 (b), the total of "expected values" is 0.

The total of the "expected value" corresponds to the expected value of the increase / decrease (balance) of medals in the unit game. Hereinafter, this will be simply referred to as the medal balance. In the present embodiment, the balance of medals in the above (I) to (VI) is as follows.

(I) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 3) performed in the RT0 game state: -0.421829224
(II) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 2) performed in the RT0 game state: -0.3662
(III) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 3) performed in the RT1 game state: -0.240142822
(IV) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 2) performed in the RT1 game state: −0.3052
(V) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 3) performed in the BB game state: -0.6204833398
(VI) Balance of medals in unit games (number of medals inserted: 2) performed in the MB game state: 0

In the RT0 gaming state, a three-card game ((I) above) or a two-card game ((II) above) is performed. The balance of medals in (I) above and the balance of medals in (II) above are larger than the balance of medals in (II) above. Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the two-card game than to play the three-card game. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays an image for notifying that it is advantageous to perform the two-card game in the RT0 game state.

As shown in FIG. 132 (a), in the internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (three-card game), "MB" is not defined as the internal winning combination, and in the three-card game in the RT0 game state. "MB" does not win internally. Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), in the internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (two-card game), "BB" is not defined as the internal winning combination, and the two-card game in the RT0 game state is played. In the game, "BB" does not win the inside. In the RT0 game state, "BB" can be internally won only in a three-card game, while "MB" can be internally won only in a two-card game.

"BB" is a so-called carry-over combination (see FIG. 138 (a)), and when "BB" wins internally in the RT0 gaming state, the combination corresponding to "BB" (see FIG. 124) is along the effective line. Until the stop display is displayed (until "BB" wins a prize), the state in which "BB" is internally won is carried over. The state in which the "BB" is internally won is called the "BB carry-over state".

Similarly, "MB" is a so-called carry-over combination (see FIG. 138 (a)), and when "MB" wins internally in the RT0 gaming state, the combination corresponding to "MB" (see FIG. 126) is an effective line. Until the stop is displayed along with (until "MB" wins), the state in which "MB" is internally won is carried over. The state in which the "MB" is internally won is called the "MB carry-over state".

When "BB" or "MB" wins internally in the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 121). The RT1 gaming state is a "BB carry-over state" or an "MB carry-over state". The "BB carry-over state" and the "MB carry-over state" are not distinguished as the main game state.

In the RT1 gaming state, a three-card game ((III) above) or a two-card game ((IV) above) is performed. The balance of medals in (III) above and the balance of medals in (IV) above are larger than the balance of medals in (III) above. Therefore, in the RT1 game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the three-card game than to play the two-card game. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays an image for notifying that it is advantageous to play the three-card game in the RT1 game state.

When "BB" wins in the RT1 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the BB gaming state (see FIG. 121). The balance of medals in the BB game state is the smallest among the balance of medals in the above (I) to (VI). That is, the BB gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

When "MB" is won in the RT1 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the MB gaming state (see FIG. 121). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), in the MB game state, the "CB combination" always wins internally. As shown in FIGS. 127 to 131, when the "CB combination" is internally won, all combinations (see FIG. 126) to be paid out when displayed on the valid line are displayed on the valid line. Is allowed. As a result, in the MB game state, the game in which two medals are inserted and two medals are paid out is repeated, and as described above, the balance of medals in the MB game state is 0.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
The medal acceptance / start check process performed in step S12 of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a medal reception / start check process performed in the main control circuit.

Since the processes other than step S1054 in FIG. 135 are the same as the processes in steps S50 to S62 in FIG. 61, the description thereof is omitted here.

In step S1054, the main CPU 93 generates the input number notification command data, and stores the generated input number notification command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95. The input number notification command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (not shown) performed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71. The input number notification command data includes information indicating the game status flag stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) of the main RAM 95. By receiving the input number notification command data, the sub-control circuit 101 executes a process related to notification of the number of medals inserted (the number of inserted medals) that is advantageous for the player (see FIG. 142).

<Internal lottery processing>
The internal lottery process performed in step S14 of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process performed in the main control circuit.

The processing of steps S108 to S1086 of FIG. 136 is the same as the processing of steps S80 to S86 of FIG. 62, but the processing of step S1080 will be described in more detail below.

In step S1080, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the main game state and the number of medals inserted. Specifically, when the main gaming state is the RT0 gaming state and the number of medals inserted is three, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (three-card game) shown in FIG. 132 (a). To do. Further, when the main game state is the RT0 game state and the number of medals inserted is two, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (two-card game) shown in FIG. 132 (b). Further, when the main game state is the RT1 game state and the number of inserted medals is 3, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state (three-card game) shown in FIG. 133 (a). Further, when the main game state is the RT1 game state and the number of medals inserted is two, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state (two-card game) shown in FIG. 133 (b). Further, when the main gaming state is the BB gaming state, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table for the BB gaming state shown in FIG. 134 (a). Further, when the main gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table for the MB gaming state shown in FIG. 134 (b).

In the present embodiment, it is described that the internal lottery is performed based on the internal lottery table even in the MB game state as in the other game states, but the internal lottery table for the MB game state is provided. In the MB game state, the flags corresponding to all the combinations to be paid out without the internal lottery may be set.

<Game status flag transition process>
The game state flag transition process performed in step S1086 of FIG. 136 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a game state flag transition process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 138 (a) is a diagram showing a carry-over combination storage area. FIG. 138 (b) is a diagram showing a game state flag storage area.

The carry-over combination storage area shown in FIG. 138 (a) is provided in the main RAM 95, and data representing the carry-over combination is stored. The size of the storage area of the carry-over combination storage area is 1 byte. Bit 7 of the carry-over combination storage area corresponds to BB, and when the internal winning combination BB is determined as a result of the internal lottery processing, "1" is stored in bit 7 of the carry-over combination storage area. Bit 6 of the carry-over combination storage area corresponds to MB, and when the internal winning combination MB is determined as a result of the internal lottery processing, "1" is stored in bit 6 of the carry-over combination storage area. The state in which "1" is stored in the carry-over combination storage area is held until the combination of symbols corresponding to BB or MB is displayed on the valid line. From the unit game that wins the BB or MB to the unit game that wins a prize, maintaining the state in which "1" is stored in these bits is called "carry-over". The BB and MB stored in the carry-over combination storage area are referred to as "carry-over combination".

The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 138 (b) is provided in the main RAM 95, and is a flag for indicating whether or not the game state is the BB game state, and whether or not the game state is the RB game state. A flag to indicate whether the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, a flag to indicate whether the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, and the gaming state is the MB gaming state. A flag is stored to indicate whether or not. The size of the storage area of the game state flag storage area is 1 byte.

When the gaming state is the BB gaming state, bit 7 is set to "1" (on), and when the gaming state is the RB gaming state, bit 6 is set to "1" (on), and the gaming state. When is in the RT0 gaming state, bit 5 is set to "1" (on), and when the gaming state is in the RT1 gaming state, bit 4 is set to "1" (on) and the gaming state is MB. In the gaming state, bit 3 is set to "1" (on).

In FIG. 137, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area (step S1090). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not bit 7 of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 138 (a)) is “1”.

When it is determined that the BB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT gaming state (step S1091). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) to “1” and bit 5 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) to “0”. To. After executing the process of step S1091, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1090 that the BB is not stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area (step S1092). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bit 6 of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 138 (a)) is “1”.

When it is determined that the MB is not stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 93 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the MB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT gaming state (step S1093). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) to “1” and bit 5 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) to “0”. To. After executing the process of step S1093, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

<Bonus end check process>
The bonus end check process performed in step S27 of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process performed in the main control circuit.

First, the main CPU 93 executes the processes of steps S1280 to S1288, but since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S280 to S289 of FIG. 69, the description thereof is omitted here.

When it is determined in step S1280 that the current gaming state is not the BB gaming state, or after executing the process of step S1288, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state ( Step S1289). The main CPU 93 can recognize the current game state by referring to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) of the main RAM 95. When it is determined that the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 performs CB end processing (step S1290). In the MB game state, the CB game state ends each time a unit game is performed. Then, by repeating the CB end process and the CB operation process (see step S1308 in FIG. 140), in the MB game state, the end and operation of the CB game state are repeated until the MB game state ends.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter (step S1291). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter by subtracting the number of medals paid out in the MB game state from the preset number of medals to be paid out.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is smaller than 0 (step S1292). When it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is not smaller than 0, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is smaller than 0, the main CPU 93 performs the MB end process (step S1293). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) to “0”.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT gaming state (step S1294). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates bit 5 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) to “1”.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data, and stores the generated bonus end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S1295). The bonus end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (not shown) performed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71. As a result, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize that the MB game state has ended.

After executing the process of step S1295, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

<Bonus operation check process>
The bonus operation check process performed in step S28 of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process performed in the main control circuit.

First, the main CPU 93 executes the processes of steps S1300 to S1306, but since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S290 to S296 of FIG. 70, the description thereof is omitted here.

When it is determined in step S1303 that BB is not displayed on the effective line, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (step S1307). The main CPU 93 can recognize the current game state by referring to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) of the main RAM 95.

When it is determined that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 performs the CB operation process (step S1308). By repeating the CB operation process and the CB end process (see step S1290 in FIG. 139), in the MB game state, the operation and end of the CB game state are repeated until the MB game state ends. After executing the process of step S1308, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1307 that the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB has won a prize (step S1309). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed along the effective line is the symbol combination corresponding to the MB (see FIG. 126).

In the present embodiment, even if the MB is carried over, in the three-card game during the RT1 game state, the reel so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is not stopped and displayed along the effective line. Stop control is performed, and in the RT1 game state, the MB can win a prize only when the two-card game is played. In this respect, in the three-card game during the RT1 game state, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is stopped and displayed along the effective line, the game state is configured so as not to shift to the MB game state. May be good. The same applies to the BB, and in the RT1 game state, the BB is configured so that a prize can be won only when a three-card game is played.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the MB has won a prize, the main CPU 93 performs the MB operation process (step S1310). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates the bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) to "1" and the bit 4 to "0". Then, the main CPU 93 performs the CB operation process (step S1311).

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 138 (a)) (step S1312). Then, although not shown, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined number (“14”) in the bonus end number counter. Every time a medal is paid out in the MB game state, the value of the bonus end number counter is subtracted, and when the value of the bonus end number counter becomes smaller than 0, the MB game state ends (FIG. 139). See steps S1291 to S1293). In the present embodiment, since the number of medals paid out in one unit game in the MB game state is two, the MB game state ends when the unit game is performed eight times.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data, and stores the generated bonus start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S1313). The bonus start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (not shown) performed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71. As a result, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize that the MB gaming state has started. After executing the process of step S1313, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1309 that the MB has not won a prize, the main CPU 93 executes the processes of steps S1314 and S1315, but these processes are the same as the processes of steps S297 and S298 of FIG. 70. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

<Production content determination process>
The effect content determination process performed in step S410 of FIG. 79 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process performed in the sub-control circuit.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S1430 and S1431, but since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S430 and S431 of FIG. 81, the description thereof is omitted here.

When it is determined in step S1430 that the initialization command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input number notification command data (see step S1054 in FIG. 135) has been received (step S1432).

When it is determined that the input number notification command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes the input number notification command reception processing (step S1433), and ends this subroutine.

The processing at the time of receiving the input number notification command will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving the input number notification command performed in the sub-control circuit.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (step S1460). Since the input number notification command data received in step S1432 of FIG. 141 includes information indicating the game status flag stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 138 (b)) of the main RAM 95, the input number notification By receiving the command data, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 displays an image (inserted number notification image) on the liquid crystal display device 11 for notifying that it is advantageous to perform the two-card game. (Step S1461).

The inserted number number notification image is an image for notifying the number of medals (the number of inserted medals) that is advantageous for the player. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 stores two-sheet suggestion image data and three-sheet suggestion image data as data corresponding to the input number notification image (inserted number notification image data). The two-sheet suggestion image data corresponds to an image for notifying that it is advantageous to perform a two-sheet game, and the three-sheet suggestion image data is advantageous to perform a three-sheet game. It corresponds to the image for notifying that there is.

In the process of step S1461, the sub CPU 102 determines, among the input number notification image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76, the two-sheet multiplication suggestion image data as the data used for the current input number notification. As a result, an image that urges the player to hang two sheets (for example, a character image such as "may be advantageous for two sheets") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as an input number notification image. ..

After executing the process of step S1461, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1460 that the current gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (step S1462). When it is determined that the current gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 displays an image (inserted number notification image) for notifying that it is advantageous to perform the three-sheet game. Is displayed (step S1463). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines, among the input number notification image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76, the three-sheet multiplication suggestion image data as the data used for the current input number notification. As a result, an image that urges the player to hang three sheets (for example, a character image such as "may be advantageous for three sheets") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as an input number notification image. ..

After executing the process of step S1463, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the processing at the time of receiving the input number notification command performed in step S1433 of FIG. 141 has been described with reference to FIG. 142.

In FIG. 141, after executing the processing at the time of receiving the input number notification command (step S1433), the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1432 that the input number notification command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S1434 to S1449, and these processes are the processes of steps S432 to S447 of FIG. Since the processing is the same, the description here will be omitted.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above. The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(I-1) With a game medium insertion means (MAX bet button 14 and 1 bet button 15, and a main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 135) capable of inputting a game medium for one unit game. ,
Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and display window 4) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
Start command means (start lever 16 and start switch 64) that output a start command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 136) for determining the internal winning combination, and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display means (process in step S19 in FIG. 59 and process in step S324 in FIG. 71). Main CPU 93) that executes
Stop command means (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and stop switch 17S) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, the stop display of the symbol whose variation is being displayed by the variation control means is stopped. Control means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 68 and the process of step S324 of FIG. 71) and
A game medium giving means (step of FIG. 59) that grants a number of game media determined based on the number of game media thrown in from the game medium throwing means and the display mode of the symbol stopped and displayed by the stop control means. The main CPU 93) that executes the processing of S25 and
With a game state transition means (main CPU 93 that executes the processes of FIGS. 137, 139, and 140) that shifts the game state from one of the plurality of game states to another game state. ,
Notification data storage means (ROM cartridge board 76) capable of storing notification data for notifying the player of information, and
A notification output means (liquid crystal display device 11) capable of outputting notification based on the notification data, and
A notification means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 142) for notifying information to the player by the notification output means based on the notification data stored in the notification data storage means is provided.
The plurality of gaming states are the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), and the display mode corresponding to the specific winning combination after the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the general gaming state. Including the specific role carry-over state (RT1 game state) until the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means.
The general game state (RT0 game state) is among M numbers from the first predetermined number to the M predetermined number (M is an integer of 2 or more) from the game medium input means for one unit game. While it is a game state in which any number of game media (2 or 3 medals) can be inserted, the specific combination carry-over state (RT1 game state) is for one unit game. Insert any number of game media (2 or 3 medals) from the N number of the first specific number to the N specific number (N is an integer of 2 or more) from the game medium insertion means. It is a game state that can be played,
During the general game state (RT0 game state), a predetermined number of K games (K is any of 1 to M) of game media (two medals) are inserted from the game medium insertion means. The balance of the game medium obtained by subtracting the number of game media input from the game medium input means from the number of game media provided by the game medium granting means in the unit game is in the general game state (RT0 game state). The number of game media inserted from the game medium insertion means in a unit game performed by inserting a number of game media (three medals) other than the Kth predetermined number from the game medium insertion means is described above. Greater than the balance of game media subtracted from the number of game media granted by the game media granting means,
By inserting the L-th specified number (L is any of 1 to N) of the game media (3 medals) from the game medium insertion means during the specific combination carry-over state (RT1 game state). In the unit game to be performed, the balance of the game medium obtained by subtracting the number of game media input from the game medium input means from the number of game media provided by the game medium granting means is the specific role carry-over state (RT1 game state). The number of game media inserted from the game medium insertion means in a unit game performed by inserting a number of game media (two medals) other than the L specific number into the game medium insertion means. Is larger than the balance of the game media obtained by subtracting from the number of game media given by the game medium granting means.
The notification means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 142) is
In the unit game performed during the general game state, the Kth predetermined number is notified as information for the player, while in the unit game performed during the specific combination carry-over state, the L. Notify a specific number,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT0 gaming state is such that three medals are inserted during the RT0 gaming state. It is larger than the balance of medals in the unit game performed by this. That is, in the RT0 gaming state, the balance when two medals are inserted is larger than the balance when three medals are inserted.

Further, the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT1 game state is the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT1 game state. Greater than. That is, in the RT1 game state, the balance when three medals are inserted is larger than the balance when two medals are inserted.

Then, in the unit game performed during the RT0 game state, it is notified that it is advantageous to perform the two-card game as information for the player, and in the unit game performed during the RT1 game state, the player As information on the above, it is notified that it is advantageous to perform a three-card game. That is, since the number of medals inserted that maximizes the balance is notified for each game state, even a player who plays the game for the first time can play the game with peace of mind.

In the second embodiment, the number of multiplications (K predetermined number) notified during the RT0 gaming state is two, and the number of multiplications (L specific number) notified during the RT1 gaming state is three. It was explained as. The K predetermined number and the L specific number in the present invention are not particularly limited, and the K predetermined number and the L specific number may be different numbers or the same number.

Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that one unit game is performed by inserting two (first predetermined number) or three (second predetermined number) medals in the RT0 game state. .. That is, although the case of M = 2 has been described, M in the present invention may be any integer of 2 or more. For example, in the RT0 gaming state, it may be possible to insert one (first predetermined number), two (second predetermined number), or three (third predetermined number) medals. .. In this case, M = 3. Similarly, in the second embodiment, it is described that one unit game is performed by inserting two (first specific number) or three (second specific number) medals in the RT1 game state. did. That is, although the case of N = 2 has been described, N in the present invention may be any integer of 2 or more. For example, in the RT1 game state, one (first specific number), two (second specific number), three (third specific number), or four (fourth specific number) medals are inserted. It may be possible. In this case, N = 4. Note that M and N may be the same number or different numbers.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the RT0 game state, the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting two medals and the insertion of three medals (the number of medals other than two) are obtained. Regarding the balance of medals in the unit game performed, it was explained that the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting two medals is larger. However, in the present invention, it is particularly limited as long as the balance when any of the inserted number of medals is inserted is larger than the balance when the other inserted number of medals are inserted. Not done. For example, in the RT0 game state, it is possible to insert one (first predetermined number), two (second predetermined number), or three (third predetermined number) medals, and two medals. The balance when (second predetermined number) medals are inserted may be larger than the balance when one (first predetermined number) or three (third predetermined number) medals are inserted. .. In this case, it may be notified that it is advantageous to insert two medals (second predetermined number).

Similarly, in the second embodiment, in the RT1 game state, the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting three medals and two medals (numbers other than three) are inserted. It was explained that the balance of medals in the unit game performed by the above is larger than the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting three medals. However, in the present invention, it is particularly limited as long as the balance when any of the inserted number of medals is inserted is larger than the balance when the other inserted number of medals are inserted. Not done. For example, in the RT1 game state, one (first specified number), two (second specified number), three (third specified number), or four (fourth specified number) medals are inserted. When one (first specified number) of medals is inserted, the balance is two (second specified number), three (third specified number), or four (first specified number). It may be larger than the balance when 4 specific number of medals are inserted. In this case, it may be notified that it is advantageous to insert one medal (first specific number).

In the second embodiment, in order to notify the number of inserted medals having the largest balance for each gaming state, an image for notifying an advantageous number of medals (inserted number notification image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. I explained it as a thing. The notification of the number of times to be multiplied is not limited to the notification by the image, and the notification may be performed by using sound or light. For example, the sound may be generated from the speaker as many times as the number of times that is advantageous.

(I-2) The gaming machine according to (I-1).
The game state transition means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 140) is
When the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the specific combination, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state.
The specific game state (MB game state) is a game state in which only a specified number of game media (two medals) can be inserted from the game medium insertion means into one unit game.
The notification means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 142) is
Of the unit game performed during the general game state, the unit game performed during the specific combination carry-over state, and the unit game performed during the specific game state, the unit game performed during the general game state and Only in the unit game performed during the specific role carry-over state, the number of game media is notified as information for the player.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, in the MB game state, it is possible to insert only two medals for one unit game, as in the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. In addition, the balance does not differ depending on the number of medals inserted. Then, in such an MB gaming state, the notification regarding the number of inserted medals as in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state is not performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating various playability while notifying the information only when the information related to the number of inserted medals is meaningful to the player.

In the MB game state, the number of medals that can be inserted in one unit game is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, three. In this case, in the MB game state, 3 cards are set as the number of payouts for all the combinations to be paid out, and by making sure that any one of the combinations wins a prize, 3 cards for each game are set. The medal may be paid out. Further, if the timing of the stop operation of the stop button is not appropriate, none of the combinations may be won (missed) and the medal may not be paid out.

[Third Embodiment]
The second embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment and the second embodiment also applies to the third embodiment will be omitted.

[Game state]
The main gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a transition transition of the main gaming state.

In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a main gaming state and a sub gaming state are provided. The main gaming state is a gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 4). The sub-game state is a game state controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 5). FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the main gaming state among these gaming states.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, five types of gaming states are provided as the main gaming states: RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, BB gaming state, and MB gaming state.

In the RT0 game state, one unit game is performed by inserting two or three medals. In the RT1 game state, one unit game is performed by inserting two or three medals. In the RT2 game state, one unit game is performed by inserting two or three medals. The number of medals to be inserted in the BB game state is set to three, and in the BB game state, two medals cannot be inserted to perform a unit game. The number of medals to be inserted in the MB game state is set to two, and in the MB game state, three medals cannot be inserted to perform a unit game. In addition, in any of the gaming states, it is not possible to insert one medal to perform a unit game.

From the above, the unit games according to the present embodiment can be classified into the following (i) to (viii).
(I) Unit game performed in the RT0 game state (number of medals inserted: 3)
(Ii) Unit game performed in the RT0 game state (number of medals inserted: 2)
(Iii) Unit game performed in the RT1 game state (number of medals inserted: 3)
(Iv) Unit game performed in the RT1 game state (number of medals inserted: 2)
(V) Unit game performed in the RT2 game state (number of medals inserted: 3)
(Vi) Unit game performed in the RT2 game state (number of medals inserted: 2)
(Vii) Unit game performed in the BB game state (number of medals inserted: 3)
(Viii) Unit game performed in the MB game state (number of medals inserted: 2)

[Internal lottery table]
The internal lottery table according to the present embodiment includes an internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (three-card game), an internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (two-card game), and an RT1 game state (three-card game). Internal lottery table for RT1 game state (two-card game), internal lottery table for RT2 game state (three-card game), and internal lottery table for RT2 game state (two-card game). , BB game state internal lottery table and MB game state internal lottery table are provided.

FIG. 144 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (three-card game). FIG. 144 (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (two-card game). FIG. 145 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT1 game state (three-card game). FIG. 145 (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT1 game state (two-card game). FIG. 146 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT2 game state (three-card game). FIG. 146 (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT2 game state (two-card game). FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the BB gaming state. FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the MB gaming state.

The internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (three-card game) shown in FIG. 144 (a) is a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT0 gaming state (see (i) in FIG. 143). It is an internal lottery table referred to in. The internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (two-card game) shown in FIG. 144 (b) is a unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT0 gaming state (see (ii) in FIG. 143). It is an internal lottery table referred to in.

The internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state (three-card game) shown in FIG. 145 (a) is a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT1 gaming state (see (iii) in FIG. 143). It is an internal lottery table referred to in. The internal lottery table for the RT1 game state (two-card game) shown in FIG. 145 (b) is a unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT1 game state (see (iv) in FIG. 143). It is an internal lottery table referred to in.

The internal lottery table for the RT2 game state (three-card game) shown in FIG. 146 (a) is a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT2 game state (see (v) in FIG. 143). It is an internal lottery table referred to in. The internal lottery table for the RT2 game state (two-card game) shown in FIG. 146 (b) is a unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT2 game state (see (vi) in FIG. 143). It is an internal lottery table referred to in.

The internal lottery table for the BB game state shown in FIG. 147 (a) is an internal lottery table referred to in the unit game (see (vii) in FIG. 143) performed during the BB game state. The internal lottery table for the MB gaming state shown in FIG. 147 (b) is an internal lottery table referred to in the unit game (see (viii) in FIG. 143) performed during the MB gaming state.

In the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the lottery value for each set value (1 to 6) is associated with the winning number (No.). In addition, the abbreviation of the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number is shown.

In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and the "digit" is obtained. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not "Kari" has occurred.

Further, in FIGS. 144 to 147, the "difference number", the "winning probability of each winning combination", and the "expected value" are shown for each internal winning combination. The "difference number", "winning probability of each combination", and "expected value" are numerical values obtained by the following calculations.

"Difference number" = "Payout number"-"Injection number"
"Winning probability of each role" = "lottery value" ÷ 65536
"Expected value" = "difference number" x "probability of winning each role"

The "number of medals inserted" is the number of medals inserted for one unit game. That is, the "insertion number" in the three-card game is three, and the "insertion number" in the two-card game is two.

The "number of medals to be paid out" is the number of medals to be paid out when each winning combination wins internally. The number of medals paid out when the replay role wins internally is considered to be the same as the number of medals inserted. That is, the "number of payouts" when the replay combination wins internally in the three-card game is three, and the "payout number" when the replay combination wins internally in the two-card game is two.

As a result, for example, in FIG. 144 (a), the “difference number” corresponding to the “normal lip” = 3-3 = 0. Further, in FIG. 144 (b), the “difference number” corresponding to the “normal lip” = 2-2 = 0.

If the number of medals that can be paid out in the case of internal winning differs depending on the order of stop operations (pushing order) of the stop buttons 17C, 17L, 17R, the maximum number of medals that can be paid out (pushing) The number of medals to be paid out when the order is correct) is defined as the "number of medals to be paid out". If the number of medals that can be paid out in the case of internal winning differs depending on the timing of the stop operation, the number of medals that can be paid out when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing is defined as the "number of medals to be paid out".

For example, when the "213C bell 1" is internally won, the "payout number" is 15 in the 3-card game and 2 in the 2-card game (see FIGS. 122 and 123). Therefore, in FIG. 144 (a), the “difference number” corresponding to the “213C bell 1” = 15-3 = 12. Further, in FIG. 144 (b), the "difference number" = 2-2 = 0 corresponding to the "two small winning combination". As described above, the "two-card small role" is a general term for small roles that can be internally won in a two-card game.

The "winning probability of each winning combination" is the probability that each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, in FIG. 144 (a), "winning probability of each winning combination" corresponding to "normal lip" = 3640 ÷ 65536 ≈ 0.05554199, and "winning probability of each winning combination" corresponding to "213C bell 1" = 623. ÷ 65536 ≈ 0.00950623. Further, in FIG. 144 (b), the "winning probability of each winning combination" corresponding to the "normal lip" = 8978 ÷ 65536 ≈ 0.13699341, and the "winning probability of each winning combination" corresponding to the "two small winning combination" = 44558 ÷ 65536 ≈ 0.67790112 (FIG. 144 (b) shows the calculation result for setting 1).

The "expected value" is the expected value of the number of medals increased or decreased due to the internal winning of each winning combination. For example, in FIG. 144 (a), the “expected value” corresponding to the “normal lip” ≈ 0 × 0.05554199 = 0, and the “expected value” corresponding to the “213C bell 1” ≈ 12 × 0.00950623 ≈ 0. It becomes 1.14075. Further, in FIG. 144 (b), the “expected value” corresponding to the “normal lip” ≈ 0 × 0.13699341 = 0, and the “expected value” corresponding to the “two small wins” ≈ 0 × 0.67990112 = It becomes 0.

In FIGS. 144 to 147, the total of "expected values" corresponding to each combination is shown. In FIG. 144 (a), the total “expected value” is 2.772263. In FIG. 144 (b), the total “expected value” is −0.36621. In FIG. 145 (a), the total “expected value” is 2.772308. In FIG. 145 (b), the total “expected value” is −0.30518. In FIG. 146 (a), the total of "expected values" is 2.935348975. In FIG. 146 (b), the total “expected value” is −0.30518. In FIG. 147 (a), the total “expected value” is −0.620483. In FIG. 147 (b), the total of "expected values" is 0.

The total of the "expected value" corresponds to the expected value of the increase / decrease (balance) of medals in the unit game. Hereinafter, this will be simply referred to as the medal balance. In the present embodiment, the balance of medals in the above (i) to (viii) is as follows.

(I) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 3) performed in the RT0 game state: 2.772263
(Ii) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 2) performed in the RT0 game state: -0.36621
(Iii) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 3) performed in the RT1 game state: 2.772308
(Iv) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 2) performed in the RT1 game state: −0.30518
(V) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 3) performed in the RT2 game state: 2.9533948975
(Vi) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 2) performed in the RT2 game state: -0.30518
(Vii) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 3) performed in the BB game state: -0.620483
(Viii) Balance of medals in a unit game (number of medals inserted: 2) performed in the MB game state: 0

In the RT0 gaming state, a three-card game (above (i)) or a two-card game (above (ii)) is performed. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (three-card game), the lottery value corresponding to "MB" is defined as 0, and the three-card draw in the RT0 game state is defined. In the game, "MB" does not win internally. Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), in the internal lottery table for the RT0 game state (two-card game), "BB" is not defined as the internal winning combination, and the two-card game in the RT0 game state is played. In the game, "BB" does not win the inside. In the RT0 game state, "BB" can be internally won only in a three-card game, while "MB" can be internally won only in a two-card game.

"BB" is a so-called carry-over combination (see FIG. 138 (a)), and when "BB" wins internally in the RT0 gaming state, the combination corresponding to "BB" (see FIG. 124) is along the effective line. Until the stop display is displayed (until "BB" wins a prize), the state in which "BB" is internally won is carried over. The state in which the "BB" is internally won is called the "BB carry-over state".

Similarly, "MB" is a so-called carry-over combination (see FIG. 138 (a)), and when "MB" wins internally in the RT0 gaming state, the combination corresponding to "MB" (see FIG. 126) is an effective line. Until the stop is displayed along with (until "MB" wins), the state in which "MB" is internally won is carried over. The state in which the "MB" is internally won is called the "MB carry-over state".

When "BB" wins internally in the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 143). The RT1 game state is the "BB carry-over state". When "MB" wins internally in the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 143). The RT2 game state is the "MB carry-over state".

In the RT1 gaming state, a three-card game (above (iii)) or a two-card game (above (iv)) is performed. The balance of medals in the above (iii) and the balance of medals in the above (iv) are larger than the balance of medals in the above (iii).

In the RT2 gaming state, a three-card game (above (v)) or a two-card game (above (vi)) is performed. The balance of medals in the above (v) and the balance of medals in the above (vi) are larger than the balance of medals in the above (v).

Further, the balance of medals in the above (iii) and the balance of medals in the above (v) are larger than the balance of medals in the above (v). Therefore, the balance of medals in the above (v) is the largest among the balance of medals in the above (iii) to (vi). Furthermore, the balance of medals in the above (v) is the largest among the balance of medals in the above (i) to (viii). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is most advantageous for the player to perform the three-card game in the RT2 game state.

Then, as described above, in the RT0 game state, "MB" can be internally won only in the two-card game. Therefore, in order to shift from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (a gaming state in which the most advantageous game can be performed), it is necessary to perform a two-card game in the RT0 gaming state. In the present embodiment, in the RT0 gaming state, an image for encouraging the two-card game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, even if the state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, the player cannot play an advantageous game unless the three cards are hung. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays an image for notifying that it is advantageous to play the three-card game in the RT2 game state.

The balance of medals in (i) above and the balance of medals in (ii) above are larger than the balance of medals in (i) above. Therefore, when looking only at the RT0 gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the three-card game than to play the two-card game. Therefore, by following the navigation to encourage the player to play the two-card game in the RT0 game state, the player will play a disadvantageous game in the RT0 game state. However, the player may be able to enjoy a greater benefit by shifting to the RT2 gaming state (the gaming state in which the most advantageous game can be performed) according to the navigation.

When "BB" wins in the RT1 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the BB gaming state (see FIG. 143). The balance of medals in the BB game state is the smallest among the balance of medals in the above (i) to (viii). That is, the BB gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

When "MB" is won in the RT2 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the MB gaming state (see FIG. 143). As shown in FIG. 147 (b), in the MB game state, the "CB combination" always wins internally. As shown in FIGS. 127 to 131, when the "CB combination" is internally won, all combinations (see FIG. 126) to be paid out when displayed on the valid line are displayed on the valid line. Is allowed. As a result, in the MB game state, the game in which two medals are inserted and two medals are paid out is repeated, and as described above, the balance of medals in the MB game state is 0.

<Game status flag transition process>
The game state flag transition process performed in step S1086 of FIG. 136 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing a game state flag transition process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a game state flag storage area.

The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 149 is provided in the main RAM 95, and is a flag for indicating whether or not the game state is the BB game state, and for indicating whether or not the game state is the RB game state. Flag, a flag to indicate whether the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, a flag to indicate whether the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, and whether the gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. A flag for indicating and a flag for indicating whether or not the gaming state is the MB gaming state are stored. The size of the storage area of the game state flag storage area is 1 byte.

When the gaming state is the BB gaming state, bit 7 is set to "1" (on), and when the gaming state is the RB gaming state, bit 6 is set to "1" (on), and the gaming state. When is in the RT0 gaming state, bit 5 is set to "1" (on), and when the gaming state is in the RT1 gaming state, bit 4 is set to "1" (on) and the gaming state is RT2. When the gaming state is in the gaming state, bit 3 is set to "1" (on), and when the gaming state is in the MB gaming state, bit 2 is set to "1" (on).

In FIG. 148, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area (step S2090). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not bit 7 of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 138 (a)) is “1”.

When it is determined that the BB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT gaming state (step S2091). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 149) to “1” and bit 5 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 149) to “0”. After executing the process of step S2091, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S2090 that the BB is not stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area (step S2092). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bit 6 of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 138 (a)) is “1”.

When it is determined that the MB is not stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 93 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the MB is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state as the RT gaming state (step S2093). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 149) to “1” and bit 5 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 149) to “0”. After executing the process of step S2093, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

<Production content determination process>
The effect content determination process performed in step S410 of FIG. 79 will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process performed in the sub-control circuit.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S2430 and S2431, but since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S430 and S431 of FIG. 81, the description thereof is omitted here.

After executing the process of step S2431, the sub CPU 102 sets the input number notification flag to ON (step S2432). The input number notification flag is a flag for defining the period for notifying the number of inserted sheets, and the number of inserted sheets is notified on condition that the inserted number notification flag is set to ON (see FIG. 151). .. After executing the process of step S2432, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S2430 that the initialization command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input number notification command data (see step S1054 in FIG. 135) has been received (step S2433).

When it is determined that the input number notification command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes the input number notification command reception processing (step S2434), and ends this subroutine. The processing at the time of receiving the input number notification command will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. After executing the process of step S2434, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S2433 that the input number notification command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S2435 to S2438, and these processes are the same as the processes of steps S432 to S435 of FIG. Since the processing is the same, the description here will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S2438, the sub CPU 102 executes the input number notification flag clear process (step S2439). The process of clearing the input number notification flag will be described later with reference to FIG. 152. In the present embodiment, when the three-card game is played in the RT2 game state, the input number notification flag is cleared, and the notification of the number of cards is completed. After executing the process of step S2439, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2437 that the start command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S2440 to S2449, but these processes are the same as the processes of steps S436 to S445 of FIG. Since it is a process, the description here will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S2449, the sub CPU 102 sets the input number notification flag to ON (step S2450). As a result, as the bonus game state (BB game state or MB game state) ends and the RT0 game state starts, the notification of the number of times to be multiplied is restarted (see FIG. 151). After executing the process of step S2450, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2448 that the bonus end command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S2451 and S2452, and these processes are the same as the processes of steps S446 and S447 of FIG. Since it is the process of, the description here is omitted.

The processing at the time of receiving the input number notification command performed in step S2434 of FIG. 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving the input number notification command performed in the sub-control circuit.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input number notification flag (see step S2432 and step S2450 in FIG. 150) is set to ON (step S2460). When it is determined that the input number notification flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the input number notification flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (step S2461). Since the input number notification command data received in step S2433 of FIG. 150 includes information indicating the game status flag stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 149) of the main RAM 95, the input number notification command data is used. By receiving, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an image (inserted number notification image) for encouraging the two-card game (step S2462).

The input number notification image includes an image for notifying the number of medals (number of medals inserted) that is advantageous to the player (an image for notifying the number of medals required to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous for the player). ). The ROM cartridge substrate 76 stores two-sheet suggestion image data and three-sheet suggestion image data as data corresponding to the input number notification image (inserted number notification image data). The two-sheet suggestion image data corresponds to an image for encouraging the two-sheet game, and the three-sheet suggestion image data is for notifying that it is advantageous to perform the three-sheet game. It corresponds to the image of.

In the process of step S2462, the sub CPU 102 determines, among the input number notification image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76, the two-sheet multiplication suggestion image data as the data used for the current input number notification. As a result, an image that urges the player to hang two sheets (for example, a character image such as "maybe two sheets is good") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as an input number notification image. ..

After executing the process of step S2462, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S2461 that the current gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (step S2463). When it is determined that the current gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state, the sub-CPU 102 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 displays an image (inserted number notification image) for notifying that it is advantageous to perform the three-sheet game. Is displayed (step S2464). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines, among the input number notification image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76, the three-sheet multiplication suggestion image data as the data used for the current input number notification. As a result, an image that urges the player to hang three sheets (for example, a character image such as "may be advantageous for three sheets") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as an input number notification image. ..

After executing the process of step S2464, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

The input number notification flag clearing process performed in step S2439 of FIG. 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the input number notification flag clearing process performed in the sub-control circuit.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input number notification flag (see step S2432 and step S2450 in FIG. 150) is set to ON (step S2480). When it is determined that the input number notification flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the input number notification flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (step S2481). Since the start command data received in step S2437 of FIG. 150 includes information indicating the game status flag stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 149) of the main RAM 95, the start command data is received. , The sub CPU 102 can recognize the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the current gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state, the sub-CPU 102 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not three cards have been hung (step S2482). Since the start command data received in step S2437 of FIG. 150 includes information indicating the number of medals inserted (multiplied number) for the unit game, the sub CPU 102 recognizes the multiplied number by receiving the start command data. can do.

When it is determined that the three sheets have not been hung, the sub CPU 102 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the three sheets have been hung, the sub CPU 102 sets the input number notification flag to off (step S2483). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

The pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above. The pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(II-1) With a game medium insertion means (MAX bet button 14 and 1 bet button 15, and a main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 135) capable of inputting a game medium for one unit game. ,
Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and display window 4) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
Start command means (start lever 16 and start switch 64) that output a start command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 136) for determining the internal winning combination, and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display means (process in step S19 in FIG. 59 and process in step S324 in FIG. 71). Main CPU 93) that executes
Stop command means (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and stop switch 17S) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, the stop display of the symbol whose variation is being displayed by the variation control means is stopped. Control means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 68 and the process of step S324 of FIG. 71) and
A game medium giving means (step of FIG. 59) that grants a number of game media determined based on the number of game media thrown in from the game medium throwing means and the display mode of the symbol stopped and displayed by the stop control means. The main CPU 93) that executes the processing of S25 and
With a game state transition means (main CPU 93 that executes the processes of FIGS. 139, 140, and 148) that shifts the game state from one of the plurality of game states to another game state. ,
Notification data storage means (ROM cartridge board 76) capable of storing notification data for notifying the player of information, and
A notification output means (liquid crystal display device 11) capable of outputting notification based on the notification data, and
A notification means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 151) that notifies information to the player by the notification output means based on the notification data stored in the notification data storage means is provided.
The plurality of gaming states are displayed in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), after the specific winning combination (MB) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the general gaming state, and then the display corresponding to the specific winning combination. In the embodiment, the special combination (BB) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific combination carry-over state (RT2 gaming state) until the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol displaying means, and in the general gaming state. Including the special role carry-over state (RT1 game state) until the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the special role.
The general game state (RT0 game state) is among M numbers from the first predetermined number to the M predetermined number (M is an integer of 2 or more) from the game medium input means for one unit game. It is a game state in which any number of game media (2 or 3 medals) can be inserted, and the specific role carry-over state (RT2 game state) and the special role carry-over state (RT1 game state). Is a game state in which a specific number of game media (three medals) can be inserted from the game medium insertion means for one unit game.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), the game medium (two medals) of the K predetermined number (K is any of 1 to M) among the first predetermined number to the M predetermined number. It is possible to determine the specific combination (MB) as the internal winning combination only in the unit game in which is input from the game medium input means.
It was inserted from the game medium insertion means in a unit game performed by inserting the specific number of game media (three medals) from the game medium insertion means during the specific combination carry-over state (RT2 game state). The balance of the game media obtained by subtracting the number of game media from the number of game media given by the game medium granting means is the specified number of games from the game medium input means during the special role carry-over state (RT1 game state). A game medium obtained by subtracting the number of game media inserted from the game medium insertion means from the number of game media provided by the game medium granting means in a unit game performed by inserting media (three medals). Greater than the balance of
The notification means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 151) is
In the unit game performed during the general game state, the Kth predetermined number is notified as information for the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the RT1 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state are provided as the gaming states. The balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT2 game state is the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT1 game state. Greater than. That is, when three medals are inserted, the balance of medals in the RT2 gaming state is larger than the balance of medals in the RT1 gaming state. In this respect, it can be said that the RT2 gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the RT1 gaming state.

On the other hand, in the RT0 game state, the MB can be determined as the internal winning combination only in the unit game performed by inserting two medals. That is, in order to shift to the RT2 gaming state (MB carry-over state) which is advantageous for the player, it is necessary to insert two medals in the RT0 gaming state. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in the unit game performed during the RT0 game state, the pachi-slot machine 1 is notified as information for the player. In this way, since the number of medals inserted for shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is notified, even the player who plays the game for the first time can play the game with peace of mind.

In the third embodiment, it has been described that one unit game is performed by inserting two (first predetermined number) or three (second predetermined number) medals in the RT0 game state. That is, although the case of M = 2 has been described, M in the present invention may be any integer of 2 or more. For example, in the RT0 gaming state, it may be possible to insert one (first predetermined number), two (second predetermined number), or three (third predetermined number) medals. .. In this case, M = 3.

In the third embodiment, in order to notify the number of times required to shift to a gaming state advantageous for the player, an image (image for notifying the number of input sheets) for encouraging the game to be played with the number of times is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It has been described as being displayed on the device 11. The notification of the number of times to be multiplied is not limited to the notification by the image, and the notification may be performed by using sound or light. For example, the sound may be generated from the speaker as many times as the number of times required to shift to an advantageous gaming state.

(II-2) The gaming machine according to (II-1).
The specific combination carry-over state (RT2 game state) is an N number of a first specific number to an N specific number (N is an integer of 2 or more) from the game medium input means for one unit game. It is a game state in which any number of the game media (2 or 3 medals) can be inserted.
The specific number is the Lth specific number (L is any one of 1 to N).
In a unit game performed by inserting the Lth specific number of game media (three medals) from the game medium insertion means during the specific combination carry-over state (RT2 game state), the game medium insertion means inserts the media. The balance of the game media obtained by subtracting the number of the game media from the number of the game media given by the game medium granting means from the game medium input means from the game medium input means during the specific combination carry-over state (RT2 game state) In a unit game performed by inserting a number of game media (two medals) other than a specific number, the number of game media inserted from the game medium insertion means is given by the game medium giving means. Greater than the balance of the game media subtracted from the number of
The notification means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 151) is
In the unit game performed during the specific combination carry-over state, the L-th specific number is notified as information for the player.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, when three medals are inserted, the balance of medals in the RT2 gaming state is larger than the balance of medals in the RT1 gaming state. The balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting three medals during the RT2 game state is the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT2 game state. Greater than. That is, in the RT2 game state, the balance when three medals are inserted is larger than the balance when two medals are inserted.

Therefore, it can be said that it is particularly advantageous for the player to play the game by inserting three medals in the RT2 game state. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in the unit game performed during the RT2 game state, it is notified that it is advantageous to perform such a three-card game as information for the player. , Even a player who plays a game for the first time can play a game with even greater peace of mind.

In the third embodiment, it has been described that one unit game is performed by inserting two (first specific number) or three (second specific number) medals in the RT2 game state. That is, although the case of N = 2 has been described, N in the present invention may be any integer of 2 or more. For example, in the RT2 game state, one (first specific number), two (second specific number), three (third specific number), or four (fourth specific number) medals are inserted. It may be possible. In this case, N = 4. Note that M and N may be the same number or different numbers.

Further, in the third embodiment, in the RT2 game state, the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting three medals and the insertion of two medals (the number of medals other than three) are obtained. Regarding the balance of medals in the unit game performed, it was explained that the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting three medals is larger. However, in the present invention, it is particularly limited as long as the balance when any of the inserted number of medals is inserted is larger than the balance when the other inserted number of medals are inserted. Not done. For example, in the RT2 game state, one (first specified number), two (second specified number), three (third specified number), or four (fourth specified number) medals are inserted. When one (first specified number) of medals is inserted, the balance is two (second specified number), three (third specified number), or four (first specified number). It may be larger than the balance when 4 specific number of medals are inserted. In this case, it may be notified that it is advantageous to insert one medal (first specific number).

Further, in this case, it is possible to insert one medal in the RT1 game state, and then a medal in the unit game performed by inserting one medal in the RT2 game state. The balance of medals may be larger than the balance of medals in the unit game performed by inserting one medal during the RT1 game state. Further, in this case, even in the RT1 game state, as in the RT2 game state, when one medal is inserted, the balance when one medal is inserted is not one (for example, two or three medals). It is desirable that it is larger than the balance in. That is, in the present invention, it is desirable that the number of multiplications having the largest balance in the RT2 gaming state and the number of multiplications having the largest balance in the RT1 gaming state are the same.

Further, in the third embodiment, the number of multiplications (K predetermined number) notified during the RT0 gaming state is two, and the number of multiplications (L specific number) notified during the RT2 gaming state is three. Explained as being. The K predetermined number and the L specific number in the present invention are not particularly limited, and the K predetermined number and the L specific number may be different numbers or the same number.

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been described that when the three-card game is played in the RT2 game state, the notification of the number of cards is terminated. However, in the present invention, the period during which the number of times is notified is not limited to this example, and for example, the notification may be performed in each game during the RT2 game state.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the third embodiment also applies to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

The contents of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 158. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the BB gaming state. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination and the number of payouts. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect lottery table. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pushing order and the number of payouts.

In the fourth embodiment, when "GOD" (see FIG. 153) is determined as the internal winning combination (when "GOD" is internally winning), the stop button operation (stop operation) is performed at an appropriate timing. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to "GOD" (see "GOD1" or "GOD2" shown in FIG. 155) is stopped and displayed along the valid line ("GOD1" or "GOD2" wins a prize). When "GOD1" or "GOD2" wins in the BB game state, an effect for suggesting which of the six types of setting values (1 to 6) is set (setting suggestion effect, figure). 156) is performed. Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect will be described more specifically.

[Setting suggestion effect]
In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery process (see FIG. 62) is performed in the BB game state, the internal lottery table for the BB game state shown in FIG. 153 is referred to. In the internal lottery table for the BB game state, the lottery value for each set value (1 to 6) is associated with the winning number (No.). In addition, the abbreviation of the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number is shown.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the BB game state, in any of the set values 1 to 6, the probability that the result of the internal lottery is "missing" is "12948/65536", and " The probability of winning the internal winning of the "RB role" is "36288/65536", and the probability of winning the internal winning of the "GOD" is "16300/65536". That is, the only roles that can be determined as the internal winning combination are "RB role" and "GOD", the "RB role" has an internal winning probability of about 55%, and the "GOD" has an internal probability of about 25%. Win.

FIG. 154 shows the relationship between the internal winning combination and the number of payouts. Since there are many parts to which the description given with reference to FIG. 122 in the second embodiment applies to FIG. 154, the parts different from the second embodiment will be mainly described here. In the present embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, the number of medals inserted is fixed to three regardless of the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 154, when the "GOD" wins internally, the number of medals to be paid out is 14 or 1 depending on the timing of the stop operation. This will be described in more detail with reference to the combination table for each flag shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 and the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 155.

In the combination table for each flag, the combination that is allowed to be displayed on the valid line is associated with the internal winning combination. In the symbol combination table, the number of payouts is associated with the combination of symbols.

Referring to FIGS. 14-16, when "GOD" is internally won, the combinations allowed to be displayed on the valid line are "GOD1", "GOD2", and "Bell 1"-"Bell 1". 16 ".

Referring to FIG. 155, when "GOD1" is displayed on the valid line, 14 medals are paid out, and when "GOD2" is displayed on the valid line, 14 medals are paid out. When "Bell 1" to "Bell 16" are displayed on the valid line, one medal is paid out. In FIG. 154, it is shown that the number of payouts corresponding to the internal winning combination “GOD” is “14 or 1”, of which “14” is “GOD1” or “GOD2” on the effective line. Is the number of payouts when displayed in, and "1" is the number of payouts when any one of "Bell 1" to "Bell 16" is displayed on the valid line.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 154, when the “RB combination” wins internally, the number of medals paid out is 15 regardless of the order of stop operations (push order) and the timing of stop operations. The "RB combination" corresponds to the "RB combination 1" in the first embodiment, and when the "RB combination" is internally won, the "middle yellow bell", that is, the "C bell" (see FIG. 155) is used. Win a prize.

As described above, in the BB game state, only the "RB role" and the "GOD" can be internally won. Then, when the "RB role" wins internally, 15 medals are always paid out. When the "GOD" wins internally, if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing, the "GOD1" or "GOD2" wins and 14 medals are paid out. If the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, "GOD1" and "GOD2" will be dropped and one medal will be paid out.

Here, as shown in the remarks column corresponding to “BB” in FIG. 154, the BB game state in the present embodiment ends when more than 398 medals are paid out. Then, in the BB game state, when the "C bell" wins 20 times based on the internal winning of the "RB role" and the "GOD1" or "GOD2" wins 7 times based on the internal winning of the "GOD". The total number of medals paid out is 15 x 20 + 14 x 7 = 398. At this point, since the number of medals paid out does not exceed 398, the BB game state does not end.

After that, by winning a prize of "C Bell" based on the internal winning of "RB role", 15 more medals are paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB game state is 398 + 15 = 413. Become. At this point, since the number of medals paid out exceeds 398, the BB game state ends.

In this way, during the BB game state, as a player, when the "GOD" wins internally, the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing to win "GOD1" or "GOD2" seven times, thereby winning 398 medals. It is possible to obtain a large number of medals (413 medals).

Then, in the BB game state, when the "GOD" is internally won, a lottery based on the setting suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 156 (setting suggestion effect lottery) is performed on condition that the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing. Will be done. Setting suggestion effect When the lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect is performed. The setting suggestion effect is an effect in which a specific image (setting suggestion image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

As shown in FIG. 156, in the setting suggestion effect lottery table, a lottery value is associated with each of the "winning" and the "non-winning" for each set value. When the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), the same lottery value (“26215”) is associated with each “win”. When the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6), the same lottery value (“39321”) is associated with each “win”.

That is, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), the probability of winning the setting suggestion effect lottery is "26215/65536" (about 40%), and the set value is an even number (2, In the case of 4 or 6), the probability of winning the setting suggestion effect lottery is "39321/65536" (about 60%).

Therefore, in the BB game state, if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing when the "GOD" is internally won, if the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), the probability is about 40%. If the setting suggestion image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6), the setting suggestion image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 with a probability of about 60%. Thereby, the player can predict whether the set value is an odd number or an even number through the probability that the setting suggestion image is displayed (appearance frequency of the setting suggestion image).

It should be noted that the more times the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing when the "GOD" is internally won, the more times the setting suggestion effect lottery is performed, and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion image. Will approach the expected value (40% if the set value is odd, 60% if the set value is even). Therefore, a player who is good at performing a stop operation at an appropriate timing (a player who is good at pressing technique) can accurately predict whether the set value is an odd number or an even number.

In this way, the player who can predict whether the set value is an odd number or an even number can advantageously advance the subsequent game (game in the RT0 game state). Hereinafter, the RT0 gaming state will be specifically described.

[RT0 game state]
When the BB game state ends, the game state (main game state) shifts from the BB game state to the general game state (RT0 game state) (see FIG. 7). In the present embodiment, when performing the internal lottery process (see FIG. 62) in the RT0 gaming state, the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 157 is referred to. In the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state, the lottery value for each set value (1 to 6) is associated with the winning number (No.). In addition, the abbreviation of the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number is shown.

In the first embodiment, "213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", "231L bell 2", "312L bell 1", "312L bell 2", "321L bell 1", and It has been described that the probability of winning the internal winning of "321L bell 2" is the same for all the set values (1 to 6) (see FIG. 17). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, "213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", "231L bell 2", "312L bell 1", "312L bell 2". , "321L Bell 1", and "321L Bell 2" have different internal winning probabilities depending on the set value.

Specifically, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), the probability of winning the inside of "213L bell 1", the probability of winning the inside of "213L bell 2", and the inside of "231L bell 1" The probability of winning and the probability of winning the internal of "231L Bell 2" are "7770 / 65536", the probability of winning the internal of "312L Bell 1", the probability of winning the internal of "312L Bell 2", and "321L". The probability of internal winning of "Bell 1" and the probability of internal winning of "321L Bell 2" are "1110/65536".

When the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6), the probability of winning the internal of "213L bell 1", the probability of winning the internal of "213L bell 2", and the probability of winning the internal of "231L bell 1" The probability and the probability of internal winning of "231L bell 2" are "1110/65536", the probability of internal winning of "312L bell 1", the probability of internal winning of "312L bell 2", and "321L bell 1". The probability of winning the internal winning of "321L Bell 2" and the probability of winning the internal winning of "321L Bell 2" are "7770/65536".

Hereinafter, "213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", and "231L bell 2" will be collectively referred to as "2L bell". Further, "312L bell 1", "312L bell 2", "321L bell 1", and "321L bell 2" are collectively referred to as "3L bell".

When the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), the probability of internal winning of "2L bell" ("7770/65536") is the probability of internal winning of "3L bell" ("1110 /". It is higher than 65536 "). On the other hand, when the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6), the probability of winning the internal winning of "3L bell" ("7770/6536") is the probability of winning the internal winning of "2L bell" ("" It is higher than 1110/65536 ").

In the first embodiment, the total of the internal winning probabilities of "2L bell" and "3L bell" is (4400/65536) x 8 = 35200/65536 in all the set values (1 to 6).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the total of the internal winning probabilities of "2L bell" and "3L bell" is (7700/65536) x 4+ (1100/65536) in all the set values (1 to 6). × 4 = 35200/65536, which is the same as the probability in the first embodiment.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), the lottery value corresponding to the "3L bell" is smaller than that of the first embodiment. The lottery value corresponding to "2L bell" is large. Further, when the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6), the lottery value corresponding to the "2L bell" is smaller than that of the first embodiment, and the lottery value corresponds to the "3L bell". The lottery value to be done is increasing.

Here, reference is made to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a sub-flag conversion table (see FIG. 32) according to the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, in referring to the relationship between the push order and the number of payouts in the present embodiment, FIG. 158 will be referred to.

As shown in FIG. 158, when the "213L bell" ("213L bell 1" or "213L bell 2") wins internally, a stop operation for the middle stop button 17C is performed as the first stop operation, and the second stop operation is performed. Eight medals are paid out on condition that the stop operation for the left stop button 17L is performed and the stop operation for the right stop button 17R is performed as the third stop operation. If the stop operation is performed in any other push order, the number of medals to be paid out is 1 or less, and the player performs the stop operation in an appropriate push order to obtain the maximum number of medals (8 medals). Can be paid out. When the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pressing order, the "2nd bell" (see FIG. 155) is stopped and displayed along the valid line (the "2nd bell" wins a prize) (see FIG. 16). ..

When the "231L bell" ("231L bell 1" or "231L bell 2") wins internally, the middle stop button 17C is stopped as the first stop operation, and the right stop button 17R is stopped as the second stop operation. Eight medals are paid out on condition that the operation is performed and the stop operation for the left stop button 17L is performed as the third stop operation. If the stop operation is performed in any other push order, the number of medals to be paid out is 1 or less, and the player performs the stop operation in an appropriate push order to obtain the maximum number of medals (8 medals). Can be paid out. When the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pressing order, the "2nd bell" (see FIG. 155) is stopped and displayed along the valid line (the "2nd bell" wins a prize) (see FIG. 16). ..

When the "312L bell" ("312L bell 1" or "312L bell 2") wins internally, the right stop button 17R is stopped as the first stop operation, and the left stop button 17L is stopped as the second stop operation. Eight medals are paid out on condition that the operation is performed and the stop operation for the middle stop button 17C is performed as the third stop operation. If the stop operation is performed in any other push order, the number of medals to be paid out is 1 or less, and the player performs the stop operation in an appropriate push order to obtain the maximum number of medals (8 medals). Can be paid out. When the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pressing order, the "3rd bell" (see FIG. 155) is stopped and displayed along the valid line (the "3rd bell" wins a prize) (see FIG. 16). ..

When the "321L bell" ("321L bell 1" or "321L bell 2") wins internally, the right stop button 17R is stopped as the first stop operation, and the middle stop button 17C is stopped as the second stop operation. Eight medals are paid out on condition that the operation is performed and the stop operation for the left stop button 17L is performed as the third stop operation. If the stop operation is performed in any other push order, the number of medals to be paid out is 1 or less, and the player performs the stop operation in an appropriate push order to obtain the maximum number of medals (8 medals). Can be paid out. When the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pressing order, the "3rd bell" (see FIG. 155) is stopped and displayed along the valid line (the "3rd bell" wins a prize) (see FIG. 16). ..

From the above, if the "2L bell" ("213L bell" or "231L bell") wins internally, in order to receive the maximum number of medals (8 medals) to be paid out (to win the "2nd bell"). , The player needs to perform a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation. In addition, when the "3L bell" ("312L bell" or "321L bell") wins internally, in order to receive the maximum number of medals (8 medals) to be paid out (to win the "3rd bell"), The player needs to perform a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 157, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5) in the RT0 gaming state, the probability of winning the internal winning of "2L bell" is "3L bell". If the set value is even (2, 4, or 6), the probability of internal winning of "3L bell" is higher than the probability of internal winning of "2L bell". It's getting higher.

Therefore, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), the player aims to win the "2nd bell" in view of the high probability of winning the "2L bell" internally. By performing the stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as one stop operation, there is a high possibility that the maximum number of medals (8 medals) won when the "2L bell" is internally won can be paid out.

In addition, when the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6), the player aims to win the "3rd bell" in view of the high probability of winning the "3L bell" internally. By performing a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as one stop operation, there is a high possibility that the maximum number of medals (8 medals) won when the "3L bell" is internally won can be paid out.

In this way, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation, and the setting is made. When the value is an even number (2, 4, or 6), it can be said that it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation.

Then, as described with reference to FIG. 156, in the BB game state, the player has odd (1, 3, or 5) and even (2, 4, or) set values throughout the appearance frequency of the setting suggestion image. , 6) can be predicted.

A player who predicts that the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5) will output more balls by constantly performing a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation in the RT0 game state. Can be earned. In addition, the player who predicted that the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6) will always perform a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation in the RT0 game state, thereby increasing the number. You can get a ball out. In this way, the player who can predict whether the set value is an odd number or an even number can advantageously advance the game in the RT0 game state.

In addition, where "213L bell" and "231L bell" are included in "2L bell", "2nd bell" is used when "213L bell" is internally won and when "231L bell" is internally won. As the stop operation required to win a prize, the stop buttons to be operated as the first stop operation are common, but the pressing order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation is different. Similarly, where the "3L bell" includes the "312L bell" and the "321L bell", the "3rd bell" is used when the "312L bell" is internally won and when the "321L bell" is internally won. The stop buttons that should be operated as the first stop operation are common as the stop operations required to win the prize, but the pressing order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation is different.

Then, when it can be predicted that the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation. I understand that, but there is no information about the push order in which the second stop operation and the third stop operation should be performed. Therefore, even if the middle stop button 17C is stopped as the first stop operation when the "2L bell" is internally won (even if the correct answer is given in the order in which the first stop operation is pressed), there is a 50% probability thereafter. , The second stop operation and the third stop operation are pressed in the wrong order.

Similarly, if it can be predicted that the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6), it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation. I understand that there is, but there is no information about the push order in which the second stop operation and the third stop operation should be performed. Therefore, even if the right stop button 17R is stopped as the first stop operation when the "3L bell" is hit internally (even if the correct answer is given in the order in which the first stop operation is pressed), there is a 50% probability thereafter. , The second stop operation and the third stop operation are pressed in the wrong order.

Even so, compared to the situation where the set value is completely unknown, the player who can predict the set value can enjoy a lot of balls by answering correctly in the order of pressing the first stop operation. .. Further, by having the player predict the push order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Production content determination process>
The effect content determination process performed in step S410 of FIG. 79 will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process performed in the sub-control circuit.

In the effect content determination process, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S3430 to S3447. Since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S430 to S447 of FIG. 81, the description here will be described. Omit. Hereinafter, the process at the time of receiving the start command (step S3435) and the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command (step S3441) will be described in detail.

<Processing when receiving start command>
The process at the time of receiving the start command performed in step S3435 of FIG. 159 will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process performed in the sub-control circuit.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S3450 to S3464, but since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S450 to S464 of FIG. 82, the description thereof is omitted here.

If it is determined in step S3450 that the current gaming state is not the BB carry-over state, or after executing the process of step S3464, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the BB gaming state ( Step S3465). Since the start command data received in step S3434 of FIG. 159 includes information indicating the game status flag stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 28) of the main RAM 95, the start command data is received. , The sub CPU 102 can recognize the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the current gaming state is not the BB gaming state, the sub CPU 102 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB gaming state, the sub CPU 102 is based on the information indicating the type (winning number) of the internal winning combination included in the start command data (see step S3434 in FIG. 159). , It is determined whether or not the "GOD" is internally won (step S3466). When it is determined that "GOD" has not won the internal prize, the sub CPU 102 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the "GOD" has won the internal winning, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an image ("GOD" winning notification image) for notifying that the "GOD" has won the internal winning (step). S3467).

The "GOD" winning notification image is an image for notifying that the "GOD" has won the internal winning (for example, a special effect image displayed only when the "GOD" has won the internal winning). Data corresponding to the "GOD" winning notification image ("GOD" winning notification image data) is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76. In the process of step S3467, the sub CPU 102 sets the “GOD” winning notification image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76. As a result, the "GOD" winning notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

By displaying the "GOD" winning notification image, the player can recognize that the "GOD" has won the internal winning in the BB game state, and by performing the stop operation at an appropriate timing, the "GOD" winning notification image is displayed. "GOD1" or "GOD2" can be won. As a result, the player can have an opportunity to perform the setting suggestion effect.

After executing the process of step S3467, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

<Processing when receiving a winning operation command>
The process at the time of receiving the winning operation command performed in step S3441 of FIG. 159 will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a winning operation command performed in the sub-control circuit.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the BB gaming state (step S3481). Since the winning operation command data received in step S3440 of FIG. 159 includes information indicating the game state flag stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 28) of the main RAM 95, the winning operation command data is received. As a result, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the current gaming state is not the BB gaming state, the sub CPU 102 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB gaming state, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "GOD1" or "GOD2" has won a prize (step S3482). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the symbol combination displayed along the valid line to "GOD1" or "GOD1" based on the information indicating the type of display combination included in the winning operation command data (see step S3440 in FIG. 159). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponds to "GOD2" (see FIG. 155).

When it is determined that neither "GOD1" nor "GOD2" has won a prize, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that "GOD1" or "GOD2" has won a prize, the sub CPU 102 executes a setting suggestion effect lottery (step S3483). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing the lottery based on the setting suggestion effect lottery table (see FIG. 156) stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting suggestion effect lottery has been won (step S3484). When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 sets the setting suggestion effect data (step S3485). The setting suggestion effect data is data corresponding to the setting suggestion image and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76. By executing the process of step S3485, the setting suggestion image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

The setting suggestion image itself is only a general effect image and does not include information indicating a setting value. Therefore, the player cannot determine the set value from the setting suggestion image itself displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. However, when "GOD1" or "GOD2" wins in the BB game state, the setting suggestion image is displayed with a probability according to the set value (odd number or even number). Therefore, by observing how often the setting suggestion image appears when "GOD1" or "GOD2" is repeatedly won in the BB game state, the player can set the set value between odd and even numbers. It is possible to predict which of these is.

After executing the process of step S3485, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described above. The pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(III-1) A symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and a display window 4) capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
Start command means (start lever 16 and start switch 64) that output a start command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the internal winning combination determines the internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to one set value set from a plurality of types of setting values. Determining means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 62) and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display means (process in step S19 in FIG. 59 and process in step S324 in FIG. 71). Main CPU 93) that executes
Stop command means (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and stop switch 17S) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, the stop display of the symbol whose variation is being displayed by the variation control means is stopped. Control means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 68 and the process of step S324 of FIG. 71) and
A game medium granting means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of step S25 of FIG. 59) that grants a number of game media determined based on the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed by the stop control means, and
When a specific condition is satisfied based on the operation by the player (when the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing), the specific effect (setting suggestion effect) is executed with a probability corresponding to the one set value. A setting suggestion effect executing means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 161) that suggests which of the plurality of types of setting values is set is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the first set value (settings 1, 3, 5) is set as the set value, the first combination (setting 1, 3, 5) as the internal winning combination is compared with the case where the second set value is set. "213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", "231L bell 2") are determined with high probability, while the second setting value (settings 2, 4, 6) is used as the setting value. When is set, as compared with the case where the first set value is set, the second winning combination (“312L bell 1”, “312L bell 2”, “321L bell 1” is used as the internal winning combination. , "321L Bell 2") with high probability,
The stop control means
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means corresponds to the first predetermined stop operation (when the stop operation for the middle stop button 17C is performed as the first stop operation), the first stop operation is performed. While causing the symbol display means to stop and display the symbol in a display mode corresponding to the combination of, the stop command signal output from the stop command means responds to a second predetermined stop operation different from the first predetermined stop operation. In the case of the above (when the stop operation for the right stop button 17R is performed as the first stop operation), the symbol display means is made to stop and display the symbol in the display mode corresponding to the second combination.
The game medium imparting means is
When the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the first combination or the second combination, a number of game media determined based on the display mode is given.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The specific effect is executed with different probabilities depending on whether the first set value is set as the set value or the second set value is set.
A game machine characterized by that.

(III-2) The gaming machine according to (III-1).
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
Depending on whether the first set value is set as the set value or the second set value is set as the set value, the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The internal winning combination is determined so that the sum of the probability of the combination and the probability of determining the second combination is equal.
It is characterized by that.

(III-3) Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and display window 4) capable of displaying fluctuation and stop of symbols, and
Start command means (start lever 16 and start switch 64) that output a start command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the internal winning combination determines the internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to one set value set from the N set values. Determining means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 62) and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display means (process in step S19 in FIG. 59 and process in step S324 in FIG. 71). Main CPU 93) that executes
Stop command means (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and stop switch 17S) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, the stop display of the symbol whose variation is being displayed by the variation control means is stopped. Control means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 68 and the process of step S324 of FIG. 71) and
A game medium granting means (main CPU 93 that executes the process of step S25 of FIG. 59) that grants a number of game media determined based on the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed by the stop control means, and
When a specific condition is satisfied based on the operation by the player (when the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing), the setting suggestion to execute the specific effect (setting suggestion effect) with a probability corresponding to the one set value. The effect executing means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of FIG. 161) is provided.
The N setting values (6 setting values 1 to 6) are K groups (odd group (odd number group)) called a first setting value group to a Kth setting value group (K is an integer of N or less). It belongs to one of the two groups (1, 3, 5) and the even group (2, 4, 6).
The first to Kth roles (“2L bell” and “3L bell”) are provided as the internal winning combination.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When a set value belonging to the third set value group (L is any one of 1 to K) (for example, an odd number group (1, 3, 5)) is set as the set value, the internal winning is achieved. As the combination, the Lth combination (for example, "2L bell") of the first combination to the Kth combination is determined with a high probability as compared with the combination other than the Lth combination.
The stop control means
The stop command signal output from the stop command means is a K type of stop operation (a stop operation in which an operation for the middle stop button 17C is performed as the first stop operation) of a first predetermined stop operation to a K predetermined stop operation. And the Lth predetermined stop operation (for example, the operation for the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation) among the two types of stop operations, that is, the operation for the right stop button 17R is performed as the first stop operation. When it corresponds to the stop operation to be performed), the symbol display means is made to stop and display the symbol in the display mode corresponding to the Lth combination.
The game medium imparting means is
When the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the Lth combination, a number of game media determined based on the display mode are given.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, one of the six set values is set (the six set values are an odd group (1, 3, 5) and an even group. (Belonging to any of the two groups (2, 4, 6)), when a specific stop operation (stop operation at an appropriate timing) is performed, the set value of the one is set. A specific effect (setting suggestion effect) is executed with a corresponding probability. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to determine the set value through the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears.

On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, "2L bell" and "3L bell" are provided as internal winning combinations, and "2nd bell" (when "2L bell" is internally winning). In order to win a prize (a combination in which the maximum number of medals (8 medals) are paid out), it is necessary to perform a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation, and the "3rd bell" ("3L bell" is inside. In order to win a prize (a combination in which the maximum number of medals (8 medals) won in the case of winning is paid out), it is necessary to perform a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation. Then, when a set value belonging to an odd number group (1, 3, 5) is set as a set value, "2L bell" is determined with a high probability as an internal winning combination, and therefore, as a player, " By performing a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation aiming at winning the "2nd bell", there is a high possibility that many medals can be won. In addition, when a set value belonging to an even number group (2, 4, 6) is set as a set value, "3L bell" is determined with a high probability as an internal winning combination, so that as a player, " By performing a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation aiming at winning the "3rd bell", there is a high possibility that many medals can be won. It should be noted that the "2nd bell" and the "3rd bell" do not win at the same time, and the player cannot aim at these combinations at the same time.

From the above, when the set values belonging to the odd number groups (1, 3, 5) are set, it is advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation. It can be said that. Further, when the set values belonging to the even-numbered groups (2, 4, 6) are set, it is advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation for the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation. I can say. Then, when it can be determined from the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears that the set value belonging to the odd number group (1, 3, 5) is set, the player stops first. By performing a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as an operation, more balls can be enjoyed. Further, when it is possible to determine from the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears that a set value belonging to an even number group (2, 4, 6) is set, the player stops first. By performing a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as an operation, more balls can be enjoyed. As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, by causing the player to perform a stop operation based on the information obtained from the opportunity to determine the set value, the subsequent game is advantageous. It is possible to advance the game, which prevents the game from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, when the "2L bell" (first role) wins internally in the RT0 gaming state, the player is not notified that the "2L bell" wins internally, and the "3L bell" (first role) wins. When the role of 2) is internally won, the player is not notified that the "3L bell" is internally won. In the present invention, it is desirable that, when the first combination or the second combination is internally won, the information necessary for winning the combination is not notified to the player. Assuming that the notification is performed, the player can perform an advantageous stop operation according to the notification regardless of whether or not the set value is predicted. Therefore, "based on the information obtained from the opportunity to determine the set value". This is because the significance of the present invention of "promoting the subsequent game in an advantageous manner by performing the stop operation" is lost.

In the fourth embodiment, when the "GOD" is internally won in the BB game state, the stop operation (specific stop operation) is performed at an appropriate timing, so that the "GOD1" or "GOD2" wins and the "GOD1" is awarded. It was explained that the setting suggestion effect lottery is performed when "GOD2" is won, and the setting suggestion effect is performed on condition that the setting suggestion effect lottery is won. In the present invention, the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is performed is not limited to the unit game in the BB game state, and the setting suggestion effect may be performed in a game state other than the BB game state. For example, when a specific small combination (a combination different from the first combination and the second combination) is internally won during the general game state, a setting suggestion effect lottery is performed when a specific stop operation is performed. It may be said.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the "GOD" is internally won in the BB game state, a stop operation (specific stop operation) should be performed at an appropriate timing (set by performing a specific stop operation). It was explained that the "GOD" winning notification image is displayed in order to inform the player that the suggestion effect can be performed). As described above, in the present invention, it is desirable that the player is configured to be able to recognize the timing at which a specific stop operation (stop operation that triggers the setting suggestion effect lottery) should be performed. .. For example, in the fourth embodiment, it has been described that "GOD" wins internally with a predetermined probability (about 25%) in the BB game state, but in the present invention, "GOD" is used in each unit game in the BB game state. "Is always an internal win. In this case, the player who knows that the "GOD" always wins internally in each unit game during the BB game state recognizes that a specific stop operation may be performed in any unit game during the BB game state. can do.

Further, also in the above aspect in which the setting suggestion effect lottery is performed when a specific stop operation is performed when a specific small winning combination is internally won during the general game state, the timing at which the specific stop operation should be performed is also performed. It is desirable to notify the player that the small winning combination has won the internal winning when a specific small winning combination has won the internal winning. Further, if the notification in the general game state is performed only when a specific small winning combination is internally won, the timing when the notification is performed in the general game state and the timing when the specific stop operation should be performed coincide with each other. , The notification is a signal that a specific stop operation should be performed, and the player can more accurately recognize the timing.

Note that the specific stop operation is not limited to the stop operation at an appropriate timing, and may be a stop operation in an appropriate push order, or a stop operation in an appropriate push order and an appropriate timing. May be good. In addition, the condition that triggers the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the specific stop operation, and some condition is satisfied based on the operation by the player (operation other than the stop operation or the stop operation). In some cases, the setting suggestion effect may be performed.

In the fourth embodiment, it has been described that the setting suggestion image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as a specific effect (setting suggestion effect). The specific effect in the present invention is not limited to the effect using such an image, and may be an effect using sound or light, or a combination thereof.

In the fourth embodiment, even if the stop operation (first predetermined stop operation) for the middle stop button 17C is performed as the first stop operation, the "2nd bell" (combination corresponding to the first combination) does not win a prize. There is a possibility that even if the right stop button 17R is stopped as the first stop operation (second predetermined stop operation), the "3rd bell" (combination corresponding to the second combination) may not win. Explained as having sex. That is, performing a stop operation (first predetermined stop operation) for the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation is a necessary condition for winning the "2nd bell" (combination corresponding to the first combination). Is not a sufficient condition, and performing a stop operation (second predetermined stop operation) for the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation is for winning the "3rd bell" (combination corresponding to the second combination). It was explained that it is a necessary condition but not a sufficient condition. As described above, in the present invention, it is necessary to perform the Lth predetermined stop operation in order to win the combination corresponding to the Lth combination, but when the Lth predetermined stop operation is performed, It is not always necessary to win the combination corresponding to the third role. Of course, when the Lth predetermined stop operation is performed, the combination corresponding to the Lth combination may be always won.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the case where the first set value (settings 1, 3, 5) is set and the case where the second set value (settings 2, 4, 6) are set. The winning probability of the first role ("213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", "231L bell 2") and the second role ("312L bell 1") , "312L bell 2", "321L bell 1", "321L bell 2") are equal to the winning probability. On the other hand, when the first set value (settings 1, 3, 5) is set, the first combination ("213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", "231L bell" 2 ”) has a high winning probability, and when the second set value (settings 2, 4, 6) is set, the second combination (“312 L bell 1”, “312 L bell 2”, “321 L bell” 1 ”and“ 321L bell 2 ”) have a high winning probability. As a result, there are cases where the first set value (settings 1, 3, 5) is set and the case where the second set value (settings 2, 4, 6) is set. The actual return rate of medals can be made different by having the player perform a stop operation according to the suggestion of the set value based on a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) while keeping the rates the same.

The payout rate is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted. If the theoretical ball output rate is the same, the theoretical "medal balance" is also the same. The theoretical "medal balance" is the expected value of the increase / decrease (balance) of medals in one unit game, and is the "expected value" (FIGS. 132 to 134 and 144) obtained for each internal winning combination. (See FIG. 147). The details are as described in the second embodiment and the third embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

In the fourth embodiment, it has been described that the probability of winning the internal winning of the BB (bonus) is the same for all the set values (1 to 6) in the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 157). In the present invention, the winning probability of the bonus, the winning probability of the AT, and the like may be made different according to the set value to provide a difference in the theoretical payout rate for each set value. As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, the actual return rate of the medal is set as the set value by causing the player to perform the stop operation according to the suggestion of the set value based on the specific effect (setting suggestion effect). It can be varied according to. Therefore, by combining the above-mentioned embodiment in which the winning probability of the bonus, the winning probability of the AT, etc. are different according to the set value and the fourth embodiment, the difference is compared with the difference for each set value of the theoretical payout rate. , The difference for each set value of the actual return rate of the medal can be made larger or smaller.

In the present invention, when the AT game state (a state in which information for winning a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination is notified) is provided, the process related to the operation and end of the AT game state or the AT game state is in progress. The processing related to the notification performed in 1 may be performed in the main control circuit 91 or may be performed in the sub control circuit 101.

In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of medals won when the "2L bell" (first role) is won internally (the number of medals paid out when the "2nd bell" wins) and the "3L bell" (second combination). It was explained that the maximum number of medals won (the number of medals paid out when the "3rd bell" wins) is the same (8) when the role) wins internally. In the present invention, the maximum number of medals won when the first winning combination is internally won may be different from the maximum number of medals won when the second winning combination is internally won. For example, the number of payouts when the "2nd bell" (combination corresponding to the first combination) is won is 5, and the number of payouts when the "3rd bell" (combination corresponding to the second combination) is won. "3rd bell" (combination corresponding to the second role) won more than the number of payouts when "2nd bell" (combination corresponding to the first role) was won, such as 10 cards. The number of payouts in the case may be larger. Even in such an embodiment, when the set values belonging to the odd-numbered groups (1, 3, 5) are set, the stop operation for the middle stop button 17C (first predetermined stop operation) is performed as the first stop operation. ) Is an advantageous way for the player to hit, and when the set values belonging to the even-numbered groups (2, 4, 6) are set, the stop operation (for the right stop button 17R) is performed as the first stop operation. It is the same as the fourth embodiment in that it is an advantageous way for the player to perform the second predetermined stop operation). When the set value belonging to the odd number group (1, 3, 5) is set, the number of payouts when the "2nd bell" (combination corresponding to the first combination) is won is "3rd bell" (first). The winning probability of "2L bell" (first winning combination) is "3L bell" (second winning combination), which is 1/2 of the number of payouts when the combination corresponding to the winning combination) is won. This is because the expected value of the ball output is larger for the "2L bell" (first role) than for the "3L bell" (second role).

In the present invention, the first set value group (odd number group (1, 3, 5) is performed on the premise that the stop operation (first predetermined stop operation or second predetermined stop operation) is performed according to the set value. ))) When the set value (first set value) belonging to) is set, the first combination ("213L bell 1", "213L bell 2", "231L bell 1", "231L bell 2") The expected value of the ball output is larger than the expected value of the ball output of the second role ("312L bell 1", "312L bell 2", "321L bell 1", "321L bell 2"), and the second setting When the set value (second set value) belonging to the value group (even group (2, 4, 6)) is set, the second combination ("312 L bell 1", "312 L bell 2", "321 L" The expected value of the ball output of "Bell 1" and "321L Bell 2") is the ball output of the first role ("213L Bell 1", "213L Bell 2", "231L Bell 1", "231L Bell 2"). It should be larger than the expected value of. That is, the winning probability of the _first winning combination is A ₁ when the _first set value is set, the winning probability of the second winning combination is B ₁ , and the first setting value when the second setting value is set. the winning probability a ₂ winning _combination, B ₂ a winning probability of the second _role, the first winning combination has a payout number P _a medal when the first predetermined stop operation is performed upon internal winning, When the number of medals to be paid out when the second predetermined stop operation is performed when the second winning combination is internally won is written as P _B , A ₁ × P _A > B ₁ × P _B and A _It suffices if the condition of ₂ × P _A <B ₂ × P _B is satisfied. As long as this condition is satisfied, it is advantageous for the player to perform the first predetermined stop operation when the first set value is set, and the second set value is set. If this is the case, it can be said that it is an advantageous way for the player to perform the second predetermined stop operation.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the six set values 1 to 6 are the first set value group (odd group (1, 3, 5)) and the second set value group (even group (2, 4)). , 6)) have been described when they are classified into two groups. In the present invention, the grouping of set values is not limited to this example.

For example, the six setting values 1 to 6 are the first setting value group (low setting group (1, 2, 3)) and the second setting value group (high setting group (4, 5, 6)). It may be classified into two groups. Modification examples in this case are shown in FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect lottery table. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 162, when the set value is a low setting (1, 2, or 3), the same lottery value (“26215”) is associated with each “win”. ing. Further, when the set value is a high setting (4, 5, or 6), the same lottery value (“39321”) is associated with each “win”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 163, when the set value is a low setting (1, 2, or 3), the probability of internal winning of "213L bell 1", the probability of internal winning of "213L bell 2", and " The probability of winning the inside of the "231L bell 1" and the probability of winning the inside of the "231L bell 2" are "7770/65536", and the probability of winning the inside of the "312L bell 1" and the inside of the "312L bell 2". The winning probability, the internal winning probability of "321L bell 1", and the internal winning probability of "321L bell 2" are "1110/65536". When the set value is a high setting (4, 5, or 6), the probability of winning the internal of "213L bell 1", the probability of winning the internal of "213L bell 2", and the probability of winning the internal of "231L bell 1" , And, the probability of internal winning of "231L bell 2" is "1110/65536", the probability of internal winning of "312L bell 1", the probability of internal winning of "312L bell 2", "321L bell 1". The probability of winning the inside of "321L Bell 2" and the probability of winning the inside of "321L Bell 2" are "7770/65536".

Also in this modification, as in the fourth embodiment, the setting value belonging to the low setting group (1, 2, or 3) is set from the probability of appearance of a specific effect (setting suggestion effect). If it can be determined, the player can enjoy more balls by performing a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation. Further, when it can be determined from the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears that the set value belonging to the high setting group (4, 5, or 6) is set, the player can determine. By performing a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation, it is possible to enjoy more balls.

In the above, the case where the six set values 1 to 6 are classified into two groups (that is, the case where K = 2) has been described. In the present invention, the value of K is not particularly limited as long as it is equal to or less than the number of set values (N).

Modification examples in the case of K = 4 are shown in FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect lottery table. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. In this modification, the six setting values 1 to 6 are the first setting value group (setting 1), the second setting value group (settings 2 and 3), and the third setting value group (setting 4, setting 4,). It is classified into four groups, 5) and a fourth set value group (setting 6).

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 164, when the setting value (1) belonging to the first setting value group is set, the lottery value (“19661”) is associated with the “win”. ing. Further, when the set value (2 or 3) belonging to the second set value group is set, the lottery value (“26215”) is associated with the “win”. Further, when the set value (4 or 5) belonging to the third set value group is set, the lottery value (“39321”) is associated with the “win”. Further, when the set value (6) belonging to the fourth set value group is set, the lottery value (“45875”) is associated with the “win”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 165, when the setting value (1) belonging to the first setting value group is set, the probability of winning the internal winning of "213L bell 1" and the internal winning of "213L bell 2" The probability of winning is "14430/65536", and the probability of winning the inside of "231L bell 1", the probability of winning the inside of "231L bell 2", the probability of winning the inside of "312L bell 1", "312L bell 2" The probability of internal winning of "321L bell 1", the probability of internal winning of "321L bell 1", and the probability of internal winning of "321L bell 2" are "1110/65536". When the set value (2 or 3) belonging to the second set value group is set, the probability of winning the internal of "231L bell 1" and the probability of winning the internal of "231L bell 2" are "14430 /". 65536 ”, the probability of winning the inside of“ 213L Bell 1 ”, the probability of winning the inside of“ 213L Bell 2 ”, the probability of winning the inside of“ 312L Bell 1 ”, the probability of winning the inside of“ 312L Bell 2 ”,“ The probability of winning the inside of "321L bell 1" and the probability of winning the inside of "321L bell 2" are "1110/65536". When the set value (4 or 5) belonging to the third set value group is set, the probability of internally winning the "312L bell 1" and the probability of internally winning the "312L bell 2" are "14430 /". 65536 ", the probability of winning the internal of" 213L Bell 1 ", the probability of winning the internal of" 213L Bell 2 ", the probability of winning the internal of" 231L Bell 1 ", the probability of winning the internal of" 231L Bell 2 "," The probability of winning the inside of "321L bell 1" and the probability of winning the inside of "321L bell 2" are "1110/65536". When the setting value (6) belonging to the fourth setting value group is set, the probability of internally winning the "321L bell 1" and the probability of internally winning the "321L bell 2" are "14430/65536". The probability of winning the internal of "213L Bell 1", the probability of winning the internal of "213L Bell 2", the probability of winning the internal of "231L Bell 1", the probability of winning the internal of "231L Bell 2", "312L Bell" The probability of winning the internal winning of "1" and the probability of winning the internal winning of "312L bell 2" are "1110/65536".

Also in this modification, as in the fourth embodiment, it is determined from the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears that the set value (1) belonging to the first set value group is set. When this is done, the player performs a stop operation for the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation, a stop operation for the left stop button 17L as the second stop operation, and a stop operation for the right stop button 17R as the third stop operation. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy more balls. Further, when it can be determined from the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears that the set value (2 or 3) belonging to the second set value group is set, the player can determine that the set value (2 or 3) is set. By performing a stop operation for the middle stop button 17C as a 1 stop operation, a stop operation for the right stop button 17R as a second stop operation, and a stop operation for the left stop button 17L as a third stop operation, more balls can be played. be able to. Further, when it can be determined from the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears that the set value (4 or 5) belonging to the third set value group is set, the player can determine that the set value (4 or 5) is set. By performing a stop operation for the right stop button 17R as a 1 stop operation, a stop operation for the left stop button 17L as a second stop operation, and a stop operation for the middle stop button 17C as a third stop operation, more balls can be enjoyed. be able to. Further, when it can be determined from the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears that the set value (6) belonging to the fourth set value group is set, the player stops the first. By performing a stop operation for the right stop button 17R as an operation, a stop operation for the middle stop button 17C as the second stop operation, and a stop operation for the left stop button 17L as the third stop operation, it is possible to enjoy more balls. it can.

In the above, when a plurality of setting values belong to one setting value group (for example, odd-numbered groups (1, 3, 5) in the fourth embodiment), the plurality of setting values are won in the setting suggestion effect lottery. It has been described that the probabilities (probabilities of winning the setting suggestion effect) are the same (see FIG. 156). In the present invention, when a plurality of setting values belong to one setting value group, the setting suggestion effect winning probability corresponding to one setting value of the plurality of setting values corresponds to the other setting values. It may be different from the production winning probability. A modified example in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect lottery table. In this modification, the RT0 gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 163 is used.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 166, the probability of winning the setting suggestion effect is different for all the set values (1 to 6). Specifically, "13108", "19661", and "26215" are associated with the lottery values for "winning" in the low setting groups (1, 2, 3), respectively, and the high setting groups (4, 5) are associated with each other. , 6) correspond to "39321", "45875", and "52428" (values larger than the lottery value for "winning" in the low setting groups (1, 2, 3)), respectively. It is attached.

Also in this modification, if the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears is low, the player expects that the set value belonging to the low setting group (1, 2, 3) is set. If the probability that a specific effect (setting suggestion effect) appears is high, it can be expected that the set value belonging to the high setting group (4, 5, 6) is set. Then, when it can be predicted that the set value belonging to the low setting group (1, 2, 3) is set, the player performs a stop operation on the middle stop button 17C as the first stop operation. Therefore, more balls can be enjoyed. Further, when it can be predicted that the set value belonging to the high setting group (4, 5, 6) is set, the player performs a stop operation on the right stop button 17R as the first stop operation. Therefore, more balls can be enjoyed.

In this way, a plurality of setting values belong to one setting value group, and the setting suggestion effect winning probability corresponding to one setting value (setting value A) of the plurality of setting values is the other setting value. Setting suggestion effect corresponding to (setting value B) If it is different from the winning probability, it is easy to distinguish the setting value depending on whether the setting value A is set or the setting value B is set. It will be different. For example, in the example of FIG. 166, the setting values belonging to the high setting groups (4, 5, 6) are set when the setting 6 is set as compared with the case where the setting 4 and the setting 5 are set. It becomes easier to predict what is being done.

1 Pachislot machine (game machine)
3L, 3C, 3R reel 4, 4L, 4C, 4R display window (design display means)
11 Liquid crystal display device (image display means, game state transition notification means, history display means)
14 MAX bet button 15 1 bet button 17S Stop switch (stop operation detection means)
51L, 51C, 51R stepping motors (design change means, reel stop control means)
56 External centralized terminal board 93 Main CPU (internal winning combination determination means, reel stop control means, winning determination means, state transmission means)
102 Sub CPU (game state transition means, game state transition notification means, special mode transition means, decorative symbol determination means, decorative symbol display means, advantageous game state addition means, additional game number setting means)
200 external device

Claims (2)

A symbol display means capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols,
A start command means that outputs a start command signal in response to an operation by the player,
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the internal winning combination determines the internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to one set value set from a plurality of types of setting values. Determining means and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display means and the fluctuation control means.
A stop command means that outputs a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, the stop display of the symbol whose variation is being displayed by the variation control means is stopped. Control means and
A game medium giving means for giving a number of game media determined based on a display mode of a symbol displayed as stopped by the stop control means, and
When a specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a specific timing, the plurality of said by executing the specific effect with a probability corresponding to the one set value. It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means that suggests which of the set values of the types is set.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the first set value is set as the set value, the first combination is determined with a high probability as the internal winning combination as compared with the case where the second set value is set, while the said When the second set value is set as the set value, the second combination is determined with a high probability as the internal winning combination as compared with the case where the first set value is set.
The stop control means
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means corresponds to the first predetermined stop operation, the symbol display means is made to stop and display the symbol in the display mode corresponding to the first combination. When the stop command signal output from the stop command means corresponds to a second predetermined stop operation different from the first predetermined stop operation, the display mode corresponding to the second combination is used. Make the symbol display means stop and display the symbol,
When a specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a specific timing, the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.
When a specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing, a predetermined symbol combination different from the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. ,
The game medium imparting means is
When the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the first combination or the second combination, a number of game media determined based on the display mode is given.
When the specific symbol combination or the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a number of game media determined based on the symbol combination is given.
When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, less game medium is given than when the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The specific effect is executed with different probabilities depending on whether the first set value is set as the set value or the second set value is set.
When a specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing, the specific effect is not executed.
A game machine characterized by that. A symbol display means capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols,
A start command means that outputs a start command signal in response to an operation by the player,
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the internal winning combination determines the internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to one set value set from a plurality of types of setting values. Determining means and
With the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display means and the fluctuation control means.
A stop command means that outputs a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means, the stop display of the symbol whose variation is being displayed by the variation control means is stopped. Control means and
A game medium giving means for giving a number of game media determined based on a display mode of a symbol displayed as stopped by the stop control means, and
When a specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation by the player is performed at a specific timing, the plurality of said by executing the specific effect with a probability corresponding to the one set value. A setting suggestion effect execution means that suggests which of the set values of the types is set, and
A notification means for notifying information on the internal winning combination is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the first set value is set as the set value, the first combination is determined with a high probability as the internal winning combination as compared with the case where the second set value is set, while the said When the second set value is set as the set value, the second combination is determined with a high probability as the internal winning combination as compared with the case where the first set value is set.
The stop control means
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means corresponds to the first predetermined stop operation, the symbol display means is made to stop and display the symbol in the display mode corresponding to the first combination. When the stop command signal output from the stop command means corresponds to a second predetermined stop operation different from the first predetermined stop operation, the display mode corresponding to the second combination is used. Make the symbol display means stop and display the symbol,
The game medium imparting means is
When the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the display mode corresponding to the first combination or the second combination, a number of game media determined based on the display mode is given.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The specific effect is executed with different probabilities depending on whether the first set value is set as the set value or the second set value is set.
The notification means is
When the specific combination is determined, the notification that the specific combination has been determined is notified, and the specific combination is determined.
When the first combination is determined, the notification that the first combination has been determined is not notified, and the first combination is not notified.
When the second combination is determined, it does not notify that the second combination has been determined.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images